Contents

Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 502
1 of 502

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual PDF

Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the con tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle"). Start with the quick guide, discover your vehicle's highlights or broaden your knowledge with useful tips.

Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

20558409283 2055840928

Order no. P205 2403 13 Part no. 205 584 09 28 Edition B-2021

C-Class Convertible Operator's Manual

Mercedes-BenzMe rce

de s-B

en z

C-C las

sC on ve rti ble

Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany

Front passenger airbag warning

Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

As at 17.06.20

Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment

R Technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2055840928

2055840928

Symbols ........................................................ 5

At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10 Indicator and warning lamps (Wide screen Cockpit) ............................................ 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18

Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20

General notes ............................................. 21 Protecting the environment .......................... 21 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 21 Operator's Manual ........................................ 22 Service and vehicle operation ...................... 23 Operating safety ........................................... 24 Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ..................................... 25 Diagnostics connection ................................ 26

Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 27 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 27 Notes for persons with electronic medi cal aids ......................................................... 27 Problems with your vehicle ........................... 28 Reporting safety defects ............................... 28 Limited Warranty .......................................... 29 QR code for rescue card ............................... 29 Data storage ................................................. 29 Copyright ...................................................... 34

Occupant safety ......................................... 35 Restraint system ........................................... 35 Seat belts ..................................................... 37 Airbags ......................................................... 42 Roll bar ......................................................... 49 PRE-SAFE system ....................................... 50 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ................................................................. 51 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 62

Opening and closing .................................. 63 SmartKey ...................................................... 63 Doors ............................................................ 67

Trunk ............................................................ 70 Soft top ........................................................ 72 Side windows ................................................ 78 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 82

Seats and stowing ..................................... 84 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi tion ............................................................... 84 Seats ............................................................ 85 Steering wheel .............................................. 94 Easy entry and exit feature ........................... 96 Memory function .......................................... 97 Stowage areas .............................................. 98 Sockets ....................................................... 104 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .. 104 Installing/removing the floor mats ............. 106

Light and visibility ................................... 108 Exterior lighting .......................................... 108 Interior lighting ............................................ 113 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 114 Mirrors ........................................................ 116

2 Contents

Climate control ......................................... 120 Overview of climate control systems .......... 120 Operating the climate control system ......... 120

Driving and parking ................................. 124 Driving ........................................................ 124 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 134 Automatic transmission .............................. 136 Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 140 Refueling ..................................................... 141 Parking ....................................................... 143 Driving and driving safety systems ............. 150 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 199

Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 200 Notes on the instrument display and on- board computer .......................................... 200 Instrument display overview ....................... 201 Overview of buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 202 Operating the on-board computer .............. 202 Overview of displays on the multifunc tion display ................................................. 203

Head-up Display ......................................... 203

Voice Control System .............................. 206 Notes on operating safety .......................... 206 Operation ................................................... 206 Using the Voice Control System effec tively ........................................................... 208 Essential voice commands ......................... 208

Multimedia system .................................. 220 Overview and operation .............................. 220 System settings .......................................... 229 Fit & Healthy ............................................... 240 Navigation .................................................. 242 Telephone ................................................... 267 Online and Internet functions ..................... 291 Media ......................................................... 294 Radio .......................................................... 306 Sound ......................................................... 313

Maintenance and care ............................. 316 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ......... 316 Engine compartment ................................... 317

Cleaning and care ....................................... 323

Breakdown assistance ............................ 333 Emergency .................................................. 333 Flat tire ....................................................... 334 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 341 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 346 Electrical fuses ........................................... 351

Wheels and tires ...................................... 354 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 354 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 354 Notes on snow chains ................................ 355 Tire pressure .............................................. 355 Loading the vehicle .................................... 362 Tire labeling ................................................ 366 Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 371 Changing a wheel ........................................ 374 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 383

Contents 3

Technical data .......................................... 385 Notes on technical data .............................. 385 Vehicle electronics ..................................... 385 Radio operating permits for vehicle com ponents ...................................................... 387 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................. 387 Operating fluids .......................................... 389 Vehicle data ................................................ 396

Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps .............................................. 398 Display messages ....................................... 398 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 447

Index ......................................................... 462

4 Contents

In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol lowing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Information on the multifunction dis

play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be

selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be

selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause

Symbols 5

Left-hand-drive vehicles

6 At a glance Cockpit

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 139

2 Combination switch 109

3 Instrument display 201

4 DIRECT SELECT lever 136

5 Media display 220

6 Glove box 101

7 Start/stop button 125

8 Climate control systems 120

9 Calls up the main functions of the multimedia system

224

A Hazard warning light system 110

B PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 47

C Storage compartment 101

D Controller for volume and switching sound on/off

220

E Switches the multimedia system on/off 220

F Extends/retracts the seat belt extender 40

G Opens and closes the soft top 72

H Activates and deactivates AIRCAP 75

I Opens the stowage compartment 101

J Opens and closes the side windows 78

K ECO start/stop function 133

L Active Parking Assist 195

M Sets the vehicle level 183

N DYNAMIC SELECT switch 135

O Touchpad 221

P Control panel for the multimedia system 202

Q Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 95

Switches the steering wheel heater on/off 95

R Control panel:

On-board computer 202

Cruise control 158

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 162

S Diagnostics connection 26

At a glance Cockpit 7

T Opens the hood 317

U Electric parking brake 147

V Light switch 108

W Control panel for:

Active Steering Assist 167

Active Lane Keeping Assist 181

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 193

Head-up Display 205

8 At a glance Cockpit

Instrument Display (standard)

10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

1L Distance warning 457

2 Power steering 450

3 #! Turn signal lights 109

4 ; Check Engine 451

5 Electric parking brake (red) 454

F USA only

! Canada only

6 Brakes (red) 454

$ USA only

J Canada only

7 Coolant temperature 451

8 Coolant temperature display 201

9 Recuperative Brake System, USA only 454

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 454

A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 454

B ! ABS 458

C 6 Restraint system 449

D Seat belt 449

E K High beam 109

F L Low beam 108

G 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

451

H Fuel level 201

I T Parking lamps 108

J R Rear fog lamp 109

K h Tire pressure monitoring system 460

L ESP OFF 458

M ESP 458

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11

Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display

12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)

1 #! Turn signal lights 109

2 R Rear fog lamp 109

3 K High beam 109

L Low beam 108

T Parking lamps 108

4 Coolant temperature 451

5 Coolant temperature display 201

6L Distance warning 457

7 Seat belt 449

8 h Tire pressure monitoring system 460

9 Power steering 450

A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 454

B Electric parking brake (red) 454

F USA only

! Canada only

C 6 Restraint system 449

D Brakes (red) 454

$ USA only

J Canada only

E 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

451

F Fuel level 201

G Recuperative Brake System, USA only 454

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 454

H Suspension 457

I # Electrical malfunction 451

J ; Check Engine 451

K ! ABS 458

L ESP OFF 458

ESP 458

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit) 13

14 At a glance Overhead control panel

1 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off

113

2 c Switches the interior lighting on/off 113

3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con trol on/off

113

4 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off

113

5 Eyeglasses compartment

6 Sun visors

7; me button 283

8 Inside rearview mirror 117

9 G SOS button 283

At a glance Overhead control panel 15

16 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment

1 Operates the memory function 98

2 Adjusts the seats electrically 87

3 Switches the seat heating on/off 92

4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off 92

5 Switches AIRSCARF on/off 93

6 Operates the outside mirrors 116

7 Opens the trunk lid 70

8 Opens/closes the right side window 78

9 Opens/closes the left side window 78

A Opens/closes the rear right side window 78

B Opens/closes the rear left side window 78

C Opens the door 67

D Locks/unlocks the vehicle 67

E Sets the seat fore-and-aft position 85

F Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support 88

G Seat adjustment using the multimedia system 89

H Adjusts the head restraints 87

I Adjusts the seat height 85

J Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 85

At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 17

18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

1 B-pillar with:

QR code for accessing the rescue card 29

2 Safety vests 333

3 me button and SOS button 283

4 To check and refill operating fluids 389

5 To tow-start and tow away 346

6 Flat tire 334

7 Starting assistance 344

8 Hazard warning light system 110

9 Fuel filler flap with:

information label on fuel type 141

Information label on tire pressure 357

QR code for accessing the rescue card 29

A To tow-start and tow away 346

B TIREFIT kit 336

C First-aid kit (soft sided) 334

D Warning triangle 333

At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Operator's Manual # Select a menu item.

In addition, you can also call up the Operator's Manual within a main function (e.g. via Media Info). The Digital Operator's Manual describes the function and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man ual is deactivated while driving.

The Digital Operator's Manual contains the fol lowing menu items: R Search: allows you to search precisely for

keywords. R Quick start: provides you with important

information so that you can start using your vehicle immediately. R Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle

in certain situations. R Messages: provides you with further informa

tion about the messages in the instrument cluster. R Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the

bookmarks you have stored yourself.

1 Picture 2 Menu 3 Navigation window

Some sections of the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warnings, can be made visible by high lighting and pressing them.

20 Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi ronment. Please observe the following rec ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor

rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).

# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the

vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable

distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration

and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each

gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# Switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.

Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon ditioned components

MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo

nents and parts from MercedesBenz AG.

General notes 21

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame

# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.

# Have aftermarket installation of acces sories carried out at a qualified special ist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for

necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 387) when ordering Mercedes- Benz GenuineParts.

Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

22 General notes

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not

be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi

cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane

number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Maintenance

Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu ment wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer

General notes 23

Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Possible danger due to substances hazard ous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures

To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and

maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts

Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec

tronic component parts or their soft ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

24 General notes

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo nents

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a

high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an

obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or

suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and

the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

or # If driving safety is impaired while con

tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work shop.

Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi cle components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications

not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno vation, Science and Economic Development Can adas RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): this device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the party responsible is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany

General notes 25

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that

you only use and connect products approved by your authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components

26 General notes

Please refer to the warranty terms and condi tions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos tics connection can lead to emissions monitor ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor rectly carry out the work required on your vehi cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work

R Modifications as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components

MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service center.

Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi bility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-

General notes 27

Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec essary, contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov

Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.

28 General notes

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans port Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes- Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll- free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat

ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage.

QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your

vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data storage Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi cle. Control units process data which, for exam ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable comfort or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what pur pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques

General notes 29

tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available on line and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov ernmental entities, upon request and to the

extent required, data stored by the manufac turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ ual cases and within the applicable legal frame work, authorized to read out data from the vehi cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,

longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas tened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature,

rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data

memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components,

such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system

components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa

tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle

damage

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.

30 General notes

If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the read out is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac turer is subject to product liability. For this rea son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These

data can also be used to examine the custom er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho

tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system

R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par ticular, when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart phone can be output via the multimedia system.

General notes 31

Certain information is simultaneously transfer red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, the day/night mode and other general vehicle sta tuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is made possible by the

vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func tions can be used via the wireless network con nection. This includes online services and appli cations/apps provided to you by the manufac turer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of serv ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con tractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per sonal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection

32 General notes

and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

Multimedia system/Mercedes me connect

If the vehicle is equipped with the multimedia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the multimedia system or Mercedes me connect. For additional information please refer to the chapter "Multimedia system" and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were

operating R Whether or not the driver and front

passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by

your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.

General notes 33

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Copyright Free and open source software

Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks

R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trade

marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen

tex Corporation. R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.

R Burmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microsoft and Windows Media are regis

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq

uity Digital Corporation. R Gracenote is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

34 General notes

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following com ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehi cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos

sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)

tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint

system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any

electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Restraint system functionality

When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys

Occupant safety 35

tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp

does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp

lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an acci dent

How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if

only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal

impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron

tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Head airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal

impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat

36 Occupant safety

is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear

ing.

R In general, the powder released is not haz ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo rate, for example.

Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu

pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 84). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must

fit tightly and snugly across the body.

Occupant safety 37

R The seat belt must be routed across the cen ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible

across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin

ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at

any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the

seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when

securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 98). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 55). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protec tive function.

38 Occupant safety

# Always ensure that the seat belt extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

If the seat belt extender does not retract auto matically, it can be retracted manually. To do so, press the seat belt extender back as far as it will go before starting the vehicle. Pressing the seat belt extender back into place requires force.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5 ft

(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys tem.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi

fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the

Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for

example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten sioning Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera tional and are unable to perform their inten ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic

Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

Occupant safety 39

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt

is fully retracted.

Extending/retracting the seat belt extender

When the door is closed, the seat belt extender extends. You can also extend the seat-belt extender by using the seat-belt extender button in the center console. The seat belt extender button may also be located in the switch panel above the light switch in Mercedes-AMG vehicles. # Switch on the ignition. # Press the seat belt extender button.

The seat belt extender extends.

The seat belt extender retracts again in the fol lowing cases: R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat

belt buckle R The seat belt tongue is not engaged in the

seat belt buckle within 60 seconds If you press the seat belt extender but ton again in this case, the seat belt extender will extend again. R The respective door is opened R You fold the seat backrest forwards R Nobody is sitting in the front passenger seat

If you press the seat belt extender but ton again in this case, the seat belt extender will no longer extend.

The seat belt extender must always be retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

Fastening seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further.

# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the cor responding seat.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff:

40 Occupant safety

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the front- passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front- passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem (/ page 41).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Vehicle Settings 5 Belt Adjustment # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Releasing seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened.

Occupant safety 41

R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Airbags Overview of airbags

1 Driver's knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Front passenger knee airbag 5 Head airbag 6 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head

and ribcage R Head airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat

occupants

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 60). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.

Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).

42 Occupant safety

* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front

passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the

seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the head airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protective capacity of the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor rectly fastened seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant

women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep

as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat

correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 84). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering

wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when

the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet

on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle,

observe the additional notes (/ page 52).

Occupant safety 43

R Always store and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door

and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile

navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limited protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and

do not affix objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten ded.

In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that

have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors. # Always have work on the doors or door

trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection.

44 Occupant safety

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys tem. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem.

# Do not store any objects under the co- driver seat.

# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi

tioned correctly (/ page 51). R Always comply with the child restraint sys

tem manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or

behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust

ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system

must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child

restraint system must, as far as possible, be

resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the

roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut off. # Do not place any objects between the

sitting surface and the child restraint system.

# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi

Occupant safety 45

ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos

sible.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by

supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that

their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.

# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 47).

46 Occupant safety

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.

The status of the front passenger airbag is dis played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may

deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger

airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa

bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag

shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con tinuously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

Occupant safety 47

Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 60). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward- facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi

cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If

necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 60). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person

48 Occupant safety

with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor

rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger

seat (/ page 60)

Roll bar

& DANGER Risk of injury or death due to a malfunction of the roll bars

The roll bars cannot protect vehicle occu pants as intended. # Have the roll bars checked immediately

at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury when the roll bars are triggered

There is a risk of injury. Always make sure that there is nothing in the sweep behind the rear head restraints.

& WARNING Danger of injury or death due to obstructed roll bars

If you leave objects or items of clothing on the covers of the roll bars, the roll bars can not protect as intended. Furthermore, the objects may endanger vehi cle occupants when the roll bars extend.

Occupant safety 49

# Always make sure that the there is nothing in the sweep of the roll bars.

# Always stow and secure objects in the vehicle correctly.

The roll bars are under the covers behind the rear head restraints. The roll bars are triggered when danger of the vehicle rolling over is detec ted. Once the roll bars have been triggered, you can no longer close a soft top that is open. In this case, consult the next qualified specialist work shop.

PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion)

PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with memory function: move the

front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increase

the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi

media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,

move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle

50 Occupant safety

occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle

is stationary. This brake application is can celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations: R When backing up

The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving

or

R When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle

% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 52).

Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle.

R The child restraint system must be appropri ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal

ling a child restraint system.

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat

belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Occupant safety 51

Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Observe standards for child restraint sys tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys tem (/ page 56). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a

height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

52 Occupant safety

Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur

er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys tem.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems

correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instructions.

R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 56).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 59).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 61). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 60). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur rent situation (/ page 47).

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.

Occupant safety 53

# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child

restraint systems that have been dam aged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child

restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket.

# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

54 Occupant safety

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic

ular, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system

Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 58).

Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,

ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 47). R Observe the notes on automatic front

passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 45)

Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord

ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seal belt retractor

again and correctly secure the child restraint system.

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

Occupant safety 55

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Installing a child restraint system: # When installing a child restraint system,

always observe the manufacturer's installa tion and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual.

# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.

# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor: # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.

# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.

Deactivating the special seat belt retractor: # Press the release button of the seat belt

buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to

the seat belt outlet.

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.

R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee ded.

Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys

tem together weigh more than the per missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

56 Occupant safety

restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat

ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats

and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow ing: O When using a baby car seat in weight

group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys tem.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respec tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the

vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

Occupant safety 57

1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket

Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi cle. # Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are installed

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended pro tective function. This may also cause addi tional injuries. # Always lock rear seat backrests after

installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the child restraint system is equipped

with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child

restraint system attached with LATCH- type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.

# Place the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether on the rear seat. It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc tions.

58 Occupant safety

# Fold the rear seat backrest forward. # Attach Top Tether hook2 to Top Tether

anchorage1. # Fold the rear seat backrest back. # Make sure that Top Tether belt3 is not

twisted and the rear seat backrest is locked in place.

# Secure the child restraint system with LATCH-type (ISOFIX).

# Tension Top Tether belt3 from the trunk. # Make sure that there is sufficient seat belt

strap for pulling tight.

# It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O When using a weight category I forward- facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.

Occupant safety 59

After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

% Before opening or closing the soft top, child restraint systems in weight category II or III must be removed or the head restraints of the child restraint systems must be moved to the lowest position. In this case, let the child get out before opening or closing the soft top.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 55). # Install the child restraint system.

The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

60 Occupant safety

Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Observe the specific instructions for the rear ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 61). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 47). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 60).

O Observe the child restraint system manufac turer's installation and operating instruc tions.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the

vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 55).

Occupant safety 61

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.

# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the back edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger

other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat

tended. # Always correctly secure animals while

driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier.

62 Occupant safety

SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields

# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.

SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks

2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens the trunk lid 5 Panic alarm

% If indicator lamp2 does not light up after pressing the or button, the bat tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 65). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Trunk lid

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti- theft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality.

Opening and closing 63

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Vehicle Settings 5 Acoustic Lock # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating the panic alarm

Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.

# To activate: press button1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To deactivate: briefly press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit,

with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press the and buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch

the inner surface of the door handle on the

driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the SmartKey functions

If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the button on the

SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the Smart Key.

% When the vehicle is started with the Smart Key in the storage compartment of the cen ter console, the SmartKey functions are automatically activated (/ page 126).

64 Opening and closing

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

# Press release knob1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.

# Pull out emergency key2 until it engages in the intermediate position.

# Press release knob1 again and fully remove emergency key2.

Inserting the emergency key # Press release knob1. # Insert emergency key2 to the intermediate

position or fully until it engages.

% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.

Replacing the SmartKey battery

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil

dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop.

Opening and closing 65

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 65).

# Press release knob2 down fully and slide cover1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment3 and take out the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart ment3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat tery when doing this.

# Push in battery compartment3.

# Re-attach cover1 and push it until it engages.

Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot ing

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 63).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 65).

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 69).

# Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified

specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced as well.

66 Opening and closing

Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# Pull door handle.2. Locking pin1 pops up when the door is unlocked.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the

SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY

LESS-GO.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO

Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the

door handle is used are closed.

Opening and closing 67

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or2.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface2 until the closing process has been completed.

% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 81).

If you open the trunk lid from outside, the trunk lid is automatically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva

ted. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.

# Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 64).

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 63).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 65).

# Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

(/ page 69). # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.

68 Opening and closing

# To activate: press and hold button2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/

pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna

mometer.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv er's door using the emergency key.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 65). # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go

into opening1 in the cover. # Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as

straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

# Release the door handle.

Opening and closing 69

# To unlock: turn the emergency key counter- clockwise to position1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin der until it engages and is seated firmly.

Trunk Opening the trunk lid

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before

opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

* NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta cles above the vehicle

The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi

cient clearance above the trunk lid.

# Pull trunk lid remote operating switch1. # Press and hold thep button on the

SmartKey.

70 Opening and closing

Closing the trunk lid

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han

dle recess and push it closed.

Switching separate trunk locking on or off

If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate locking is activated, the trunk will remain locked.

# To switch on: slide the switch to position 1.

# To switch off: slide the switch to position 2.

% If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.

Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release

Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and

charged.

Opening and closing 71

# Press emergency release button1 briefly.

Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Vehicle Settings 5 Trunk Lid Restriction This function allows you to avoid bumping the trunk lid on a low garage ceiling, for example. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Soft top Opening or closing the soft top using the soft-top switch

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the soft top lowering unexpect edly

If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics will depressurize after a short time. # Always fully open or close the soft top.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening or closing the soft top

Parts of the body could become trapped. # When opening or closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components.

# Release the button if somebody becomes trapped.

* NOTE Possible damage to the soft top when opening or closing

The soft top can be damaged when opening or closing. # Make sure there is sufficient clearance

above it. # Only load the trunk below the trunk

separator so that it will not be pushed upwards.

# Make sure that the trunk lid is closed. # If the soft top is dirty, wet or frozen, do

not open the soft top.

72 Opening and closing

* NOTE Damage to the soft top caused by heavy objects

Heavy objects placed on the soft-top com partment cover can damage the soft top or soft-top compartment cover. # Do not place heavy objects on the soft-

top compartment cover. # Do not sit on the soft-top compartment

cover.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends opening or closing the soft top when the vehicle is stationary. To open or close the soft top while you are driv ing, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). To avoid interrupting the closing process while you are slightly exceeding this speed, do not drive at a speed greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). # Make sure that the trunk partition is closed. # Close the trunk lid. # Switch on the ignition.

# Keep the brake pedal depressed when the vehicle is stationary.

# To open: pull and hold soft-top switch1 until the soft top is fully open. The multifunction display will show the open ing process of the soft top.

# To close: press and hold soft-top switch1 until the soft top is fully closed. The multifunction display will show the clos ing process of the soft top.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to excessive speed during the soft top opening or closing procedure

If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h), the soft top will stop during the opening or closing procedure. # Reduce the vehicle speed to below

37 mph (60 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic condi tions.

# Operate the soft-top switch again to open or close the soft top fully.

The current procedure will be stopped at a speed greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). The Open/Close Convertible Top Completely mes sage will be shown on the multifunction display. # Reduce your speed and press or pull soft-top

switch1 again.

Opening and closing 73

If the soft top does not close fully because of strong headwinds, drive more slowly or stop.

Relocking the soft top

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the soft top lowering unexpect edly

If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics will depressurize after a short time. # Always fully open or close the soft top.

If the soft top has not been completely locked, the multifunction display will show the Open/ Close Convertible Top Completely message. In addition, you will hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds while driving. # Reduce the vehicle speed to below 37 mph

(60 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Operate the soft-top switch again to open or close the soft top fully.

Opening or closing the trunk partition

The trunk partition covers luggage or loads in the trunk. Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be equipped with a manual or partially electric trunk partition. The soft top can be opened only when the man ual trunk partition is closed. In vehicles with a partially electric trunk parti tion, this will automatically close when the soft top is opened.

* NOTE Damage to the soft top or load due to long objects

The soft top or load may be damaged with the soft top open. # Do not place any overly long objects

inside or behind the side parcel nets when the trunk partition is open.

# Make sure that the load does not push the trunk partition upwards.

# All vehicles: to open, push trunk partition 2 in the opposite direction to the arrow and into its upper end position using the handle.

# Vehicles with a manual trunk partition: to close, pull trunk partition2 by the handle in the direction of the arrow until it rests on the sides of the trunk.

74 Opening and closing

# Vehicles with a partially electric trunk partition: press button1. Trunk partition2 will open or close auto matically.

% If there is a system failure, the partially elec tric trunk partition can be closed manually.

Activating or deactivating AIRCAP

AIRCAP reduces the draft in the front and rear compartments when you are driving with the soft top open. Particularly turbulent air can reduce the effect of AIRCAP. This can occur when you are driving behind another vehicle or if there is a crosswind, for example. AIRCAP consists of the following components: R A wind deflector above the windshield R A wind screen behind the two rear seat head

restraints

When AIRCAP is activated, the wind deflector and the wind screen will extend simultaneously.

AIRCAP can be activated or deactivated at speeds of up to approximately 100 mph (160 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when retracting AIRCAP

Somebody could become trapped. # Make sure that nobody holds on to the

upper frame of the windshield or touches the wind deflector or wind screen.

# Switch on the ignition. # To activate: pull button1.

AIRCAP will extend and the indicator lamp on button1 will light up.

# To deactivate: press button1. AIRCAP will retract and the indicator lamp on button1 will go out.

Opening and closing 75

If the vehicle is parked with the soft top open and the ignition is switched off, AIRCAP will retract automatically. When you restart the engine after having been parked, AIRCAP will extend again automatically.

Installing and removing the folding wind screen

& WARNING Risk of accident when using the wind screen in poor visibility condi tions

The wind screen impairs your view to the rear. # Use the wind screen only in good visibil

ity conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to an incorrectly installed wind screen

The wind screen may become loose while you are driving and endanger other road users.

# Install the wind screen as described. # Do not place any objects on the instal

led wind screen.

* NOTE The wind screen can be damaged if installed when the soft top is closed

The vehicle interior or the wind screen can be damaged if installed when the soft top closed. # To install, open the soft top.

* NOTE Damage to the wind screen due to collision with seat backrests

The wind screen may collide with the front seat backrests when installed. # Adjust the backrest positions of the

front seats.

The folding wind screen is attached above the rear seats to protect against wind when you are driving with the soft top open. Only the front seats can be occupied when the folding wind screen is installed.

The bag containing the folding wind screen is attached to the through-loading feature behind the rear seats. If the through-loading feature is being used, loosen the bag's lashing strap and stow it in the trunk. Fasten the lashing strap to the luggage hook. You should preferably perform operations involv ing the folding wind screen on the side of the vehicle facing away from traffic.

# Open all side windows and the soft top. # Fold the rear seats forward to remove the

bag.

76 Opening and closing

# Remove the folding wind screen from the bag.

# Fold out folding wind screen1 as shown. # Fold out the two brackets2 on the left and

right. # Align brackets2 of folding wind screen1

with two rear fixtures3 on the vehicle. Perform the following steps in sequence on both sides of the vehicle: # Pull handle5 in the direction of the arrow. # Align folding wind screen1 with side fixture 4 on the vehicle from above and insert.

# Push handle5 on folding wind screen1 back as far as it will go. Folding wind screen1 is locked.

Opening and closing 77

Follow the instructions in reverse order to remove the folding wind screen.

Problems with the soft top

The soft top will not open or close. Possible causes are: R The ignition is not switched on.

# Make sure that the ignition is switched on. R The brake pedal is not depressed with the

vehicle stationary.

# Depress the brake pedal. R The on-board electrical system voltage is too

low.

# Start the engine. R The trunk partition is not closed.

# Remove overhanging luggage and close the trunk partition. R The trunk lid is open.

# Close the trunk lid (/ page 71).

R The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The soft top drive has been switched off automatically and will be available again after approximately ten minutes.

# Repeat the opening or closing procedure after approximately ten minutes. R You are driving at a speed greater than

37 mph (60 km/h).

# Reduce your speed to below 37 mph (60 km/h). R The soft top mechanical components or con

trol system are defective.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but

ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.

78 Opening and closing

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched

on.

1 To close 2 To open

The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence. # To start automatic operation: press the

W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull theW button again.

% Automatic operation for closing is available only for the front side windows.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can con tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a door is opened.

Opening and closing 79

All side windows can be opened or closed simul taneously using button1. # Switch on the ignition. # To open: press and hold button1 to the

point of resistance. # To open fully: press and hold button1

beyond the point of resistance. # To close: pull and hold button1.

Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin

gers. R During resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent some one from becoming trapped in these situa tions. # During the closing process, make sure

that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if

somebody becomes trapped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening or closing the soft top

Parts of the body could become trapped. # When opening or closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components.

# Release the button if somebody becomes trapped.

80 Opening and closing

# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened when the

trunk partition is open. R The soft top is opened when the trunk

partition is closed. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is

switched on. # To interrupt convenience opening: release

the button. # To continue convenience opening: press

and hold the button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dows. # When the convenience closing feature

is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening or closing the soft top

Parts of the body could become trapped. # When opening or closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components.

# Release the button if somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The soft top is closed.

The side windows are closed when the soft top is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.

% Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO only closes the side windows (/ page 67).

Resolving problems with the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

Opening and closing 81

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you can not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the

window guide. # Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor

responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

# Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjust ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea ture. Possible cause: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 63).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 65).

Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.

The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicles battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened

82 Opening and closing

The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Indicator lamp1 flashes when the ATA system is armed.

The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart

Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R After pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 126)

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 289).

% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.

Deactivating the ATA # Press the, orp button on the

SmartKey. or

# Press the start/stop button with the Smart Key in the stowage compartment (/ page 126)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the

SmartKey outside the vehicle.

Opening and closing 83

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's

airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion

R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye

level by the center of the head restraint R You can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru

ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con

ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body

and passes across the center of your shoul der and across your hips in the pelvic area

84 Seats and stowing

Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically and electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat

is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Seats and stowing 85

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that

hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to exces sive strain on the grab handle

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize

the seating position or to assist in get ting in and out of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,

make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

86 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make

sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft position

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever3 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat cushion inclination 6 Seat fore-and-aft position

Seats and stowing 87

# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 98).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer

# Using buttons1 to4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

88 Seats and stowing

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 in the direc

tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.

# To move backwards: press and hold release knob2.

# Push the head restraint backwards and let go of release knob2.

Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints

Removal The head restraints can be removed only in vehi cles with folding rear seat backrests.

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for wards slightly (/ page 101).

# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.

# Push release knob1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the

notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until it engages.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select a seat.

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters.

Seats and stowing 89

# Adjust the air cushions.

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Adjust the air cushions.

Selecting the massage program for the front seats

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Seats # Select Driver's Seat or Front Passenger. # Select Massage. # Select a massage program.

The massage program runs for approximately 9 to 15 minutes, depending on the setting.

# To set the massage intensity: switch High Intensity on O or off .

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5a Seats 5 Reset # Select Yes or No.

Depending on whether the settings for the driv ers or front passenger seat are selected, only the selected seat can be reset.

Folding the front seat backrest forwards/ back (vehicles with memory function)

If you fold the seat backrest forwards, the seat will move forwards with the EASY-ENTRY func tion. This allows passengers to get into and out of the rear passenger compartment comfortably. # To fold forwards: pull seat release handle

1 and fold the seat backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat will move automatically to the fore most position.

# To fold back: swing back the seat backrest horizontally. If the seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the

90 Seats and stowing

instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. The seat will move automatically to the stored position.

Folding the front seat backrest forwards/ backwards (vehicles without memory func tion)

Folding forwards If you fold the seat backrest forwards, the seat will move forwards with the EASY-ENTRY func tion. This allows passengers to get into and out of the rear passenger compartment comfortably.

# If necessary, release the head restraint and push it down.

# Pull seat release handle1 and fold the seat backrest forwards until the seat backrest engages.

# Push the seat as far forwards as it will go.

Folding back # Push the seat back horizontally by the seat

backrest until it reaches the seat position that was previously set.

# Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. Do so as smoothly as possible. If the seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds.

# After the seat backrest has been folded back, check the position of the head restraint and set it to the correct position.

If the set seat position can no longer be reached, e.g. because of luggage in the rear footwell or because occupants have entered the rear passenger compartment of the vehicle: # Pull seat release handle1 again and return

the seat backrest to an upright position. The seat will lock in the new fore-and-aft position.

Seats and stowing 91

Switching the seat heating on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on

When the seat heating is switched on, over heating may occur due to objects or docu

ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu

ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

92 Seats and stowing

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

Switching AIRSCARF on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by the heating output from AIRSCARF being too high

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the outlet opening in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the outlet opening. # Turn the heating output down in good

time. # Maintain a suitable distance from the

outlet opening.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on

AIRSCARF warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. The warm air flows out of the vents in the head restraints. # To switch on: press button1.

All indicator lamps are on.

% During the switch-on process, the blower starts up only after a preheating phase last ing seven seconds.

Seats and stowing 93

# To reduce the level: press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps light up.

# To switch off: press button1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

% After switching off, the blower runs on for a few seconds to cool down the heating ele ments.

% If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, AIR SCARF may switch off.

# Adjust the AIRSCARF vent (/ page 123).

Make sure that there are no objects covering the air intake on the back of the head restraint. Make sure that objects do not enter the vents in the head restraints.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# To unlock: push release lever1 down as far as it will go.

94 Seats and stowing

# Adjust height2 and distance3 to the steering wheel.

# To lock: push release lever1 up as far as it will go.

# Check and make sure that the steering col umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height

# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 98).

Switching the steering wheel heating on/off

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

# Turn the lever in the direction of arrow1 or 2. If indicator lamp3 lights up, the steering wheel heating is switched on.

Seats and stowing 95

When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heating switches off.

Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc

ess is complete before pulling away.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in

the sweep of the steering wheel or driv er's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steer

ing wheel. The adjustment process will be stop ped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.

The adjustment process will be stop ped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can stop the adjustment process by press ing one of the memory function position switches.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they acti vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv er's seat will move back in the following situa tions: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's

door open R You open the driver's door with the ignition

switched off

96 Seats and stowing

% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the ignition

on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door with the ignition

switched on

The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off. R you save the seat settings via the memory

function.

If you press one of the memory function memory position switches, the adjustment process will be stopped.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Vehicle Settings 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering

Wheel Only or Off.

Memory function Function of the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the

driver's side when the vehicle is station ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func tion

When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the

memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the sweep of the seat or the steering wheel.

# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi ately release the memory function posi tion button. The adjustment process is stopped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

Seats and stowing 97

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the igni tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display

Operating the memory function

Storing

# Set the desired position for all systems. # Briefly press memory buttonV and then

press preset position4,T orU within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

# To call up: press and hold preset position button4,T orU until all the sys tems are in the stored position.

% When you release the preset position button, steering wheel, the seat and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The Head-up Display continues to be adjusted.

Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before

opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

98 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 45).

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi

cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers

of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the

liquid is hot.

Seats and stowing 99

* NOTE Damage to the handle in the trunk floor

If the handle in the trunk is left protruding, the handle may be damaged. # Before closing the trunk lid, detach the

handle and press it down closed again.

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart ment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully

engaged.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around

the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or

the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and

distribute the load evenly.

100 Seats and stowing

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front storage compartments

1 Storage spaces in the doors 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with a

multimedia and USB connection 3 Storage compartment in the front center

console with a USB port 4 Glove box

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. A warning tone will also sound.

Requirements: R To fold the center seat backrest forwards:

the center seat backrest has been unlocked.

You can fold the seat backrests forward sepa rately.

Seats and stowing 101

# Vehicles without a memory function: Move the driver's or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary.

Vehicles with a memory function: If neces sary, when the seat backrest in the rear passenger compartment is folded forward, the front seat will move forwards slightly to avoid a collision.

# To unlock the left and right seat back rest: pull right or left button1.

# Fold corresponding seat backrest2 for wards.

# If necessary, reset the driver's or front passenger seat.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap

ped when folding back the seat back rest.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary.

102 Seats and stowing

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction dis play on the instrument cluster. A warning tone will also sound.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 98).

1 Tie-down eyes

Attaching the parcel net

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown

around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Seats and stowing 103

# Fold up the tie-down eyes. # Hook parcel net1 into the front and rear

tie-down eyes.

Sockets Using the 12 V socket

Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W

(15 A) are permissible.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the storage compartment in the front cen

ter console R In the front passenger footwell R In the storage compartment in the center

console of the rear passenger compartment

Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console

# Fold up socket cap1. # Insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart ment open.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can

not be thrown around in such situa tions.

104 Seats and stowing

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not

place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor age compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage

devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart ment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile

phone stowage compartment.

The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed: R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec

tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni tion is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be

charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in

the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the

charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. R To ensure more efficient charging and con

nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile

Seats and stowing 105

phone. Protective covers which are neces sary for wireless charging are excluded.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone

Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless

charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com

# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen ter of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.

% The mat can be removed by the tab for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Installing/removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

106 Seats and stowing

# To install: slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the foot well.

# Press studs1 onto holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat. # To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders 2.

# Remove the floor mat.

Seats and stowing 107

Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating light switches

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light

switch position)

5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog lamp on or off

When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi

cient lighting, in accordance with the rele vant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the

right X or left W parking light.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand ing lamps or parking lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

108 Light and visibility

The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 112).

Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi ent light.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or off

Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi

tion.

# Press the R button.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left

# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.

Light and visibility 109

Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or

position. # Push the combination switch beyond the

point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.

Switching off high beam # Move the combination switch back to its

starting position.

High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction

of arrow3.

Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination

switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

# To indicate permanently: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the

driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand

but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if: R The airbag has been deployed.

110 Light and visibility

Cornering light

Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when

the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned

R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersec tion.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes

trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.

cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic

conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions.

Light and visibility 111

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will switch on automatically.

The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient

% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina

tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the multifunction display.

Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina

tion switch.

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Light Settings 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Light Settings 5 Ext. Light Switch Off # Set the switch-off delay time.

Setting the surround lighting

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Light Settings 5 Locator Lighting # Activate O or deactivate the function.

If the surround lighting is switched on, the exte rior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after the

112 Light and visibility

vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated.

Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting

1 p Left reading lamp 2 c Interior lighting 3 | Automatic interior lighting control 4 p Right reading lamp

# To switch reading lamps on/off: press but ton1 or4.

# To switch interior lighting on: push button 2 to the left.

# To switch automatic interior lighting con trol off: push button3 to the right.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Light Settings 5 Ambient Light

Setting the color # Select Color. # Set a color.

Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Set a brightness value.

Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

The Display, Front and Rear zones can be set separately.

Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay time

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Light Settings 5 Int. Light Switch Off # Set the switch-off delay time.

Light and visibility 113

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off

1 g Windshield wiper off 2 Intermittent wiping, normal 3 Intermittent wiping, frequent

4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the corre sponding position1 -5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow1. R Single wipe R Wipes with washer fluid

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again

immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold

the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 114). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.

Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind

shield.

114 Light and visibility

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 as far as it will go.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow4.

Installing the wiper blades

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor rectly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind shield.

# Switch on the ignition. # Press the button on the combination

switch (/ page 114). The wiper arms will return to the original position.

# Switch the ignition off.

Light and visibility 115

Maintenance display

# Remove protective film1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly instal led wiper blades.

When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

% The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul

der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

116 Light and visibility

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

# Briefly press button1.

Resetting the outside mirrors % If the battery has been disconnected or com

pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# Briefly press button1.

Adjusting the outside mirrors # Press button3 or4 to select the outside

mirror to be adjusted. # Use button2 to adjust the position of the

mirror glass.

Engaging the outside mirrors # Vehicles without electrically folding out

side mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec trolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro

lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte

from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact

with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed,

immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing

which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

Light and visibility 117

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi tion function

The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 118). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans

mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than

9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror

on the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button2.

# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into

the desired parking position using button1.

118 Light and visibility

Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror

using button2. # Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Vehicle Settings 5 Autom. Mirror Folding # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Light and visibility 119

Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control

An interior air filter in combination with the pre filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the air conditioning control panel

The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic cli mate control without stationary heater

1 w Sets the temperature on the driver's side

2 _ Sets the air distribution 3H Sets the airflow or switches off climate

control 4 Sets climate control to automatic

(/ page 121) 5 Defrosts the windshield 6A Calls up the air conditioning menu 7 Switches the rear window heater

on/off

80 Switches synchronization on/off (/ page 121)

9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 121)

A Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 121)

B w Sets the temperature on the front passenger side

Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theH button.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using theH button.

If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

120 Climate control

Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the button.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the button. # To switch to manual mode: press theH

or_ button.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the air condi tioning control panel

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the0 button.

The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate con trol zones are changed.

Removing condensation from the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the

button.

Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

# Press theg button. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the

windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Activating/deactivating ionization

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5b Climate Control 5 Ionization Ionization cleans and refreshes the interior air of the vehicle. Ionization of the interior air is odor less. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Climate control 121

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants

always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the

vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up

(/ page 323).

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

# To open or close: turn controller2 to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.

122 Climate control

Adjusting the AIRSCARF vents

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by the heating output from AIRSCARF being too high

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the outlet opening in the head restraints. # Turn the heating output down in good

time. # Maintain a suitable distance from the

outlet opening.

* NOTE Damage caused to AIRSCARF by the use of protective covers

If a protective cover is placed over the front seat head restraints, the flow of air from the AIRSCARF vent is hindered. This can cause AIRSCARF to overheat and be damaged. # Do not use protective covers on head

restraints with AIRSCARF.

Make sure that there are no objects covering the air inlet grille on the back of the head restraints.

# You can adjust the blower setting of AIR SCARF vents1 using the AIRSCARF button (/ page 93).

# You can adjust the height of AIRSCARF vents 1 and the current of air by adjusting the height of the head restraints (/ page 88).

Climate control 123

Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends

on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R Rear axle locking differential R AMG Performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite

brake system R Traction control R RACE START R AMG adaptive sport suspension system R AMG steering-wheel buttons

Switching on the power supply or ignition

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog

nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed.

124 Driving and parking

# To switch on the power supply: press but ton1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button1 twice more.

# To switch on the ignition: press button1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.

The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within

15 minutes and the transmission is in posi tionj or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there

are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog

nized.

# Shift the transmission to positionj ori. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non- essential consumers and press button1 once.

Driving and parking 125

# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis play message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 126).

% You can switch off the engine while driving. By pressing button1 for about three sec onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 129).

Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

# Make sure that marked space2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring. # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 on

symbol3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey1 from marked space2 the engine continues running. For further engine starts however, SmartKey1

must be located in marked space2 on sym bol3 during the entire journey.

# Have SmartKey1checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 and

leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi

cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or

the ignition with the start/stop button.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked.

126 Driving and parking

R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin

tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements: R Park positionj is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched

off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and soft top are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecu tive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. You can stop the vehicle again at any time. % Further information can be found in the

smartphone app.

Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the soft top.

Driving and parking 127

Breaking-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine

speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph

(140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive programA

or;. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat

est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to

brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at

full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past

the pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and

accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km).

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,

the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are

either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on optimized acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation con ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you

could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa tion on ESP (/ page 152).

Pulling away with optimized acceleration

& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use optimized acceleration, indi vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.

If ESP is deactivated, there is a risk of skid ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles

are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in

(/ page 128). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway.

128 Driving and parking

R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

* NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration

When pulling away with optimized accelera tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized

acceleration.

# Engage theh drive position (/ page 138). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-

ahead position. # Select the sportiest available drive program B orC(/ page 135).

# Deactivate ESP (/ page 154). # Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with

your left foot. # With your right foot, fully depress the accel

erator pedal.

# After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera tion.

# Switch on ESP once the acceleration proce dure is complete.

Ending optimized acceleration # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP. % After you pull away with optimized accelera

tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.

Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

Driving and parking 129

& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv

ing.

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,

the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur

faces to increase the engine braking effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around

the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco hol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or

allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

130 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over

revving range.

* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal

# Do not depress the brake pedal contin uously whilst driving.

# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi ately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter.

# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and

brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the

vehicle in front

To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end

of the journey and when starting the next journey

Driving and parking 131

Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 354).

Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the

lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi

cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

ECO start/stop function

Operation of the ECO start/stop function % The ECO start/stop function is not available

in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the multifunction display for this.

The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans

mission positionh ori. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

system: You depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi

cle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you

starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel

sharply or engage reverse gear.

% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park positionj, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

132 Driving and parking

The engine is restarted automatically if: R You engage transmission positionh ork. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R You open or close the soft top. R An automatic engine start is required by the

vehicle. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

system: - You release the brake pedal on a downhill

gradient and the vehicle does not roll. - The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient

and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h).

ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi function display: R The symbol (green) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol (yellow) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi tions for an engine stop have been met.

R Neither the nor symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli gent stop inhibitor was detected, for exam ple, a stop sign.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the multifunction display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch off the ignition, it is auto matically switched off after three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function

# Press button1. If indicator lamp2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated.

% Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console.

Driving and parking 133

ECO display function

The ECO display summarizes your driving char acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol lowing: R Driving with particular care R Driving the vehicle in drive program; R Observing the gearshift recommendations

The inner segment will light up and the outer segment will fill up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Moderate acceleration R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Consistent speed

The inner segment will not light up and the outer segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Sporty acceleration R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Fluctuations in speed

The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three outer segments are completely fil

led simultaneously. R The ECO display lights up.

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus

fr. Start. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multi function display of the on-board computer. = Individual R individual settings

B Sport+ R particularly sporty driving

134 Driving and parking

R emphasises the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry

road surface and a clear stretch of road

C Sports R continues to offer stability but with a sporty

setup R allows the sporty driver a more active driving

style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry

road surface and a clear stretch of road

A Comfort R comfortable and economical driving R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road conditions

; Eco R particularly economical driving R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road conditions

Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive

- Engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP

R Vehicles with AIRMATIC or DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension R Electric power steering

Selecting the drive program

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.

Driving and parking 135

Configuring drive program I

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5e DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Individual # Select the individual setting.

Switching the operation feedback for drive programs on or off

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5e DYNAMIC SELECT # Switch Notification for User on O or off .

When this function is active, a corresponding message is shown in the media display when a drive program is selected with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5e DYNAMIC SELECT # Select Vehicle Data.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5e DYNAMIC SELECT # Select Engine Data. % The actual (maximum) values that can be

achieved for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine

% The values displayed serve only as orienta tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tionh ork, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position

h ork when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

136 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.

j Park position k Reverse gear

i Neutral h Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

% To shift into neutrali with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev eral seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Driving and parking 137

# Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the

SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans mission remains in neutrali.

Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

(/ page 143). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle

comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but

tonj. When the transmission position display showsj, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position displayj appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time untilj is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

Park positionj is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle

is stationary and the transmission position is h ork. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle

is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position ish or k.

% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission positionh ork again.

Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion positionh, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal

R The driving speed

Problems with the transmission

The transmission has a faulty gear shift Possible cause: R The transmission is losing oil.

# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration characteristics get worse, and the transmission no longer shifts. Possible cause: R The transmission is in emergency operation

mode: it is only possible to shift to one gear and reverse gear.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traf fic conditions.

# Shift the transmission to positionj. # Switch off the engine. # Wait at least ten seconds.

138 Driving and parking

# Try to start the engine again. # Shift the transmission to positionh ork.

Ifh is selected, the transmission only shifts to one gear; ifk is selected, the transmis sion shifts to reverse gear.

# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Manual gearshifting

When the automatic transmission is shifted to positionh, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or

lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting

The gears shift automatically when manual gear shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle1 or2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display showsp and the current gear.

% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti vated is dependent on various factors. Manual gearshifting can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission positionh is

engaged again

R Driving style # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle1. # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display showsh.

Permanent setting: # Change to drive program=(/ page 135). # Select drive settingp (/ page 136).

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

Driving and parking 139

# If gearshift recommendation1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from

the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position displayh is

shown in green.

Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met: R Drive program; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep

uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake

pedal (except for light brake applications).

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program=.

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation

% Glide mode can be ended by pressing a steering wheel gearshift paddle (/ page 139).

Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves

140 Driving and parking

the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum

effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

Refueling Refueling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor

oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or

take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a gasoline engine:

Driving and parking 141

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a gasoline engine

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise

fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines

drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.

142 Driving and parking

1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Stationary heater indication 6 Fuel type

# Press the back area of fuel filler flap1.

# Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it.

# Insert the fuel filler cap from above into bracket2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

# Close fuel filler flap1.

Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi cle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to positionj.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable

material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.

Driving and parking 143

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away.

* NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lower ing

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: The vehicle can lower because of tempera ture differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when

driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake.

144 Driving and parking

# Engage transmission positionj in a station ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 138).

# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button1.

# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still

operate the side windows and the soft top for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener

When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. # Always make sure that nobody is within

the range of movement of the door.

Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea

ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S.

safety standards

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the

garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.

Driving and parking 145

# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to flash yellow.

# Point remote control5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.

# Press and hold button6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green contin

uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 flashes green. Pro

gramming was successful. Additionally,

synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.

# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not

included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the

garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects

are located outside the range of movement of the door.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote

control5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control5. # Hold remote control5 at various angles

from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

146 Driving and parking

# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button6 on remote control5 again before transmission ends.

# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on

1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com/mercedes

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to

operate the door.

# Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.

Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp4 flashes green: release

buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (apply ing automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in positionj and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 148).

Driving and parking 147

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing

the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta

tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle

stationary.

This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in positionh ork and

you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission positionj toh or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in positionk, the

trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: - You shift from transmission positionj.

- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).

When the electric parking brake is released, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

148 Driving and parking

# Push handle1. The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously.

Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle1.

The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.

As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The redF (USA) or! (Can ada) indicator lamp lights up in the instru ment cluster.

Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use)

Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-oper ation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears

in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup

ted.

R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is unavaila ble. R The function for detecting collisions on a

parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be

extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby

Mode message appears in the media display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.

Driving and parking 149

Activating/deactivating standby mode Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 Vehicle Settings 5 Standby Mode % This function is not available for all models. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

When you activate the function, a prompt appears.

# Select Yes. Standby mode is activated.

Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at

all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic condi tions.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

% The radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star.

1 Cameras in the outside mirrors 2 Multifunction camera 3 Front camera 4 Ultrasonic sensors 5 Rear view camera

150 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi cle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cam eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors

or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.

# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 329). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras.

Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the windshield and rear window repaired at a qualified specialist work shop.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 152) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 152) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

(/ page 152) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 153) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)

(/ page 154) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 154) R HOLD function (/ page 154)

R Hill Start Assist (/ page 155) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 156) R Cruise control (/ page 157) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 175) R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 182) R AIRMATIC (/ page 182)

Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 159) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend

ent) (/ page 163) R Route-based speed adaptation (country-

dependent) (/ page 164) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 170) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent)

(/ page 166)

Driving and parking 151

R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country- dependent) (/ page 168) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend

ent) (/ page 169) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

with exit warning (/ page 177) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 179)

Parking Package R Rear view camera (/ page 184) R Surround view camera (/ page 187) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 190) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 193)

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application

or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Function of BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres

sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro gram)

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the

following situations.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

ESP can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking.

152 Driving and parking

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to

the situation.

When ESP is deactivated, the warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking.

When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current

road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

is necessary when pulling away.

Deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 447) R Display messages (/ page 398)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if

they spin.

R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP

The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 135).

Function of ESP Crosswind Assist

ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle

speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ

ual brake application on one side.

Driving and parking 153

Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program)

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 ESP MercedesAMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog nize dangers. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Function of EBD

Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure

on the rear wheels.

R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on

a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid

System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

154 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or

in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away before you leave it.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati

cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated. R The transmission is in positionh,k ori.

Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short

time quickly depress further until the display appears in the multifunction display.

# Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the dis

play disappears from the multifunction dis play.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted. R The transmission is shifted to positionj.

R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission positionj and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's

door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the

power supply is insufficient.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The transmission is in positionh ork. R The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

Driving and parking 155

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake

pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well- rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The

driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap ted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last

break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga

156 Driving and parking

tion to this rest area. This function can be activa ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx

imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road

surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor

nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis

tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.

R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre

quently In active driving situations.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu ing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the

driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST

Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area.

# Activate O or deactivate the function . If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select a suggested rest area: you are gui ded to the selected rest area.

Speed control cruise control

Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150).

Driving and parking 157

MercedesAMG vehicles: Cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).

Displays on the multifunction display Rh (gray): cruise control is selected but

not yet activated. Rh (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears along with theh dis play. % The segments between the stored speed and

the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer.

System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly.

Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent

changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause

the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor.

Operating cruise control

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation

before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements: R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph

(20 km/h).

R The transmission is in positionh.

Operating cruise control # Press the rocker switches on the steering

wheel control panel up or down to the desired position.

Activating cruise control # SelectM with the right rocker switch.

158 Driving and parking

Activating cruise control # Press rocker switch1 upM or down N. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

or # SelectJ with the left rocker switch.

The last stored speed is called up and main tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.

Increasing or decreasing the stored speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.

or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.

or

# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch1 upM.

Adopting a detected speed # Activate cruise control. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis

played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control # SelectO with the left rocker switch.

Switching off cruise control # SelectN with the right rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP

intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack

age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)

Driving and parking 159

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the

selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if

the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in

urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country- dependent)

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical

situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150).

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster

Assistance display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route

event (/ page 164) 2 Vehicle in front

3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis

play

Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Rk (white): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set Rk (white vehicle, green speedometer):

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rk (green): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rr: Route-based speed adaptation active

(/ page 164).

The stored speed is shown along with the per manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the

green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

160 Driving and parking

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas sive mode. The Suspended message appears in the multifunction display.

Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera tions to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, are displayed in the control feedback of the multi function display on a single line.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light.

R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep

uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis

tance Assist DISTRONIC.

R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no

longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita

ble distance from the vehicle in front.

Driving and parking 161

# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when

changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta

tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions

carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in positionh. R The driver's door is closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been

successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being

used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.

# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.

Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press theH button.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

162 Driving and parking

# To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch1 upM or downN, or selectJ with the left rocker switch.

or # To activate with a stored speed: select J with the left rocker switch.

# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

Adopting a detected speed limit # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis

played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traf fic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

and remove your foot from the brake pedal.

# SelectJ with the left rocker switch. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and

firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# SelectO with the left rocker switch.

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Increasing or decreasing the speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.

or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed

and press rocker switch1 upM. Changing the specified distance to the vehi cle in front # To reduce the specified distance: press

the right rocker switch up (). # To increase the specified distance: press

the right rocker switch down ().

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 176).

Driving and parking 163

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150).

System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 175). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti ates a route event ahead in an economical, com fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 165). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll plazas R Turns and exits

164 Driving and parking

R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic Information (/ page 259))

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down

lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated.

Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off

before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or

brake pedal during the process.

System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the follow ing situations: R The road's course not clearly visible R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi

vidual lanes, for example at toll plazas R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula

ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed

speed limitations

# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting route-based speed adjustment

Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted.

Driving and parking 165

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Speed Adjustment # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower

speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist

switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R (gray): activated and passive R (green): activated and active R (red): system limits detected R (white, red hands): "hands on the steer

ing wheel" prompt

% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display.

% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes sage. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 168). The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle.

166 Driving and parking

R Depending on the country: the driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150).

System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,

fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination.

R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are

present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or at intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting

out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll plazas. R When the tire pressure is too low.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten

tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating Active Steering Assist

Requirements: R ESP must be activated, but not intervening.

Driving and parking 167

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted.

# If indicator lamp1 is off: press button2.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears in the multifunc tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn ing, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to

the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

168 Driving and parking

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with

multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro

ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph

(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in

the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active.

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change

begins after the driver has activated the turn sig nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. The message, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display. If the assistance graphic is shown when chang ing lanes, an additional arrow appears in it point ing towards the adjacent lane (/ page 159). If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the message appears in the multifunction display.

In addition, a warning tone may sound, depend ing on the situation.

& WARNING Risk of accident when chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that

the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque.

Driving and parking 169

# Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 166). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,

damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance # Select Lane Change Assist. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.

If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150).

170 Driving and parking

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently

safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your

vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and theL distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles, moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching crossing cyclists

Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead

Driving and parking 171

R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph

(200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead

R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 31 mph

(50 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary and

moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists

172 Driving and parking

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or

with kickdown

R releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of

your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving

pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if

it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement

during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening

of the vehicle.

R Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx imately 43 mph (70 km/h).

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva sive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

Driving and parking 173

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.

# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the warning lamp appears in the multifunction display. The system may be impaired or may not func tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light.

R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer

ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has

been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects

cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into

the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot

be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.

due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On curves with a tight radius.

% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only

partially available during the teach-in proc ess.

Setting Active Brake Assist Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist The settings can be adjusted when the ignition is switched on. # Select Early, Medium or Late. % Your selection is retained when the vehicle is

next started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave

Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.

The distance warning function and the auton omous braking function are deactivated. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age: When the vehicle is next started, the medium setting is automatically selected. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: Evasive Steering Assist is not available.

174 Driving and parking

When the ignition is next started, the medium setting is selected automatically and Evasive Steering Assist is available.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 150). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric

tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter mine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a

restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

% Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display.

Driving and parking 175

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes

sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 398).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi

cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

direct sunlight or reflections.

R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due

to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting. R If the information in the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs

on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs

outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Requirements: R For automatic adoption of speed limits:

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted.

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating automatic adop tion of speed limits # Select Limit Adoption. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in COMAND. # Activate O or deactivate the function. % If one of the following systems is activated,

the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control

Further information (/ page 162).

176 Driving and parking

Adjusting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or None.

Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.

Permanent status display in the instrument clus ter: R (gray): system is activated but inopera

tive R (green): system is activated and opera

tional

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed.

Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 150).

Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

Driving and parking 177

# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear ance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants.

System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in par ticular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or

motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of

their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent

vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving

objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

178 Driving and parking

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course- correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis play1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application

may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan gers (/ page 177). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is

detected.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Blind Spot Assist # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc tion camera (/ page 150). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct ing brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic

Driving and parking 179

conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis play1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not apply the brake if you acti vate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator.

You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane

marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis tance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continu ous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at

any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and

driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle,

an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par allel to your vehicle were detected in the

adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel

erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is

detected and displayed.

If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly

180 Driving and parking

detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place (/ page 182). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi

cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several

unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov

ered. R If the distance from the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.

R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Lane Keeping Assist warning

A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the origi nal lane. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your

self, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor recting brake application.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite inter vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. The system may make an inappropriate brake applica tion. The brake application can be interrupted at any time, for example, by steering slightly in the opposite direction. # Always make sure that there is suffi

cient distance to the side for other traf fic or obstacles.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: R give an unnecessary warning R not give a warning

# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the

Driving and parking 181

lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.

Be sure to observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist.

# Press button2. If indicator lamp1 lights up, Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the lane mark ings are shown as light in the assistance

graphic. When Active Lane Keeping Assist is active, the lane markings are shown in green in the assistance graphic.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Act. Lane Keep. Assist

Activating/deactivating the warning # Activate O or deactivate Lane Depart.

Warning. You do not receive any warning when leaving a lane if the lane keeping warning system is deactivated.

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is tuned individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors: R The road surface conditions R Vehicle load

R The drive program selected R The driving style

The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

AIRMATIC

Function of AIRMATIC AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia ble damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clear ance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con sumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions: R Air suspension with automatic level control R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel

consumption R Manually selectable high level setting for

greater ground clearance

182 Driving and parking

R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button

Available suspension settings A (Comfort) R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds above 77 mph

(125 km/h) the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below 50 mph

(80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.

; (Economy) R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the low level. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

C (Sport) R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to the low level.

R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.

B (Sport Plus) R The suspension setting is even firmer. R The vehicle is set to the low level. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you

are traveling at higher speeds.

% Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been cor rectly established, the vehicle remains at normal level irrespective of speed or the drive program selected.

Setting the vehicle level

& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

# Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the

vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehi cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

Driving and parking 183

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure

that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles

such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than

37 mph (60 km/h).

Raising the vehicle

# Press button1. Indicator lamp2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level.

Your selection is saved.

The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h)

and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R After selecting a drive program using the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

Lowering the vehicle # Press button1.

Indicator lamp2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive pro gram.

Rear view camera

Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown in the media dis play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle.

184 Driving and parking

This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis played only apply to road level. You can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur

face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

3 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area

4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

Wide-angle view

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Driving and parking 185

Normal view 1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)

6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))

Wide-angle view

System failure If the rear view camera is not ready for opera tion, theq display appears in the media dis play.

System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The trunk lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which

the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 150).

% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. % The display contrast may be impaired due to

incident sunlight or other light sources. In this case, pay particular attention.

186 Driving and parking

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360 camera

Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con sists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing.

The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

Views of the surround view camera You can select from different views:

1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras

in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear

5 Top view with image from the rear view cam era

6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

Top view

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle

2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less

3 Your vehicle from above

If the distance to the object lessens, the color of warning display2 changes. From a distance of

Driving and parking 187

approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) the warning display is shown in orange. From a distance of approx imately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) the warning display is shown in red. When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray.

Guide lines

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

% When Active Parking Assist is active, the lane markings are displayed in green.

The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level.

Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out

2 Marker of the wheel contact points

System failure If the rear view camera is not operational, the following message appears in the media display:

188 Driving and parking

System limits The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa tions: R The doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R The trunk lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which

the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 150).

Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking or maneuvering the vehicle.

On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. % The contrast of the display may be impaired

by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 329).

Selecting a view for the 360 Camera

Requirements: R The Auto. Rear View Cam. function is selec

ted in the multimedia system.

# Engage reverse gear. # In the multimedia system, select the desired

view.

Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after

some time or after an ignition cycle.

Setting the camera as a favorite You can call up the camera view directly in the multimedia system by setting it as a favorite. # Press the button on the control ele

ment. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards twice. The Favorites menu appears.

# Select New Favorite. # Select Vehicle. # Select Camera.

Driving and parking 189

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul tiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn Early setting in the multimedia system, the warn ing tones for front and side impact protection

can be set to sound at a greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 193). % The Warn Early setting is always active at the

rear of the vehicle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system

Vehicles without surround view camera

Vehicles with surround view camera

If you have not selected the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC1 appears in the multimedia sys tem at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h). The color of the individual segments of the warn ing display is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

190 Driving and parking

R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short

distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less

System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.

persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (/ page 150).

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Example: vehicles with surround view camera

When rear segments1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors

and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 329). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been

deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the passive side impact protec tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or when maneu vering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected

Driving and parking 191

obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in color in the display. The segment color changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow: approximately 1.0 - 2.0 ft

(30 - 60 cm) R Red: less than approximately 1.0 ft (30 cm)

In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis played.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a surround view camera

1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)

and rear (red)

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a surround view camera

1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red)

Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni

tion. R You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.

192 Driving and parking

System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from

the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged.

# Press the button in the center console.

If the indicator lamp in the button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indi cator lamp is lit or the symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started.

Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Camera & Parking 5 Set Warning Tones

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch.

Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta cle. # Select Warn Early. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives an audible warning. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur round view camera. When you are driving for wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h),

Driving and parking 193

the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. As soon as all requirements are met for search ing for parking spaces, the display appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the display appears in the multi function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no

persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol lowing situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R You engage transmission positionj. R ESP intervenes. R You open the doors or the trunk lid while

driving.

System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the bor ders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculat ing the parking procedure. In some circumstan ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects.

This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active

Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

194 Driving and parking

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more

than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly after a tire change or when spare

tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.

after bottoming out on a curb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Parking with Active Parking Assist

# Press button1.

The media display shows the view of Active Park ing Assist. Area2 displays detected parking spaces4 and vehicle path3. % Vehicle path3 shown on the media display

may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi

cle. # Select desired parking space4 and con

firm. # If necessary, select the parking direction (for

wards or reverse), and confirm. Vehicle path3 is shown, depending on selected parking space4 and the parking direction.

Driving and parking 195

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the parking procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display:

select the corresponding transmission posi tion. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis played in green in the camera image.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure,

safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa ble, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking proce dure.

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active

Parking Assist.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle.

196 Driving and parking

# Press button1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area2, select direction of travel3 Left or Right.

% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm direction of exit3 to drive out of the parking space.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto matically.

After the parking space has been exited, a warn ing tone and the Parking Assist Finished,

Driving and parking 197

Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

Maneuvering assistance

Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive

Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 193).

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are inter

changed. R If an incorrect transmission position is

engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.

R If you shift the transmission position tok or h when the vehicle is stationary. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.

3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistance function is

activated in the multimedia system.

System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 190).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehi

cles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any cross ing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically.

198 Driving and parking

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. R Maneuvering assistance is activated

(/ page 199).

% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 177).

System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.

Activating or deactivating maneuvering assistance Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5k Assistance 5 Camera & Parking 5 Maneuvering Assist. # Activate O or deactivate the function. % Maneuvering assistance must be active for

the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 198) and Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 198).

Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods (/ page 346) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 347).

Driving and parking 199

Notes on the instrument display and on- board computer

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an Instrument Display malfunction

If the Instrument Display has failed or mal functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately

at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes sages and warnings from specific systems on the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

200 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Instrument display overview

1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

2 Outside temperature 3 Time

4 Area for additional values (example: tachom eter): tachometer/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date

5 Coolant temperature display During normal operation, the coolant tem perature display is permitted to rise to 248F (120C).

6 Selected drive program

7 Selected transmission position 8 Multifunction display (example: standard dis

play for a trip): assistance/telephone/navi gation/trip/media/radio/styles and dis plays/service/possible settings for Head-up Display

9 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor

Instrument Display and on-board computer 201

Overview of buttons on the steering wheel

1P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer

2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control or Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for the multimedia system Voice Control System (/ page 206)

5 To call up the home screen of the mul timedia system

6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in

the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior

Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the on-board computer.

The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Service R DriveAssist R Trip R Navigation R Radio R Media R Phone R Head-up Disp. R Vehicles with an instrument display in

the widescreen cockpit: Designs

% You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

202 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.

% Press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func tion, an entry or a display: swipe up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To switch between displays: swipe up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.

Full-screen menus You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display: R DriveAssist

R Trip # On the corresponding menu, use the left-

hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed full- screen.

Overview of displays on the multifunction display Displays on the multifunction display Active Parking Assist activated

(/ page 195) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

(/ page 193) Cruise control (/ page 157) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 159) Active Brake Assist (/ page 174) Active Steering Assist (/ page 166) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 179)

Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 169) ECO start/stop function (/ page 132) HOLD function (/ page 154) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 111)

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 175).

Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Head-up Display projects the following into the driver's field of vision: R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driver assistance sys

tems R Some warning messages

Instrument Display and on-board computer 203

Display content

1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driver assistance system

(e.g. cruise control)

When you receive a call, the6 Incoming Call message will appear on the Head-up Display. In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated.

System limits The visibility is influenced by the following condi tions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the Head-up Display off and on again.

Adjusting the Head-up Display settings on the on-board computer

On-board computer: 4 Head-up Disp.

1 Setting currently selected 2 Digital speedometer 3 Traffic Sign Assist 4 Navigation displays

The following can be adjusted for the Head-up Display: R Position R Brightness

204 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R Display Content # To select a setting: swipe upwards or down

wards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down

wards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

# Press button1.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 205

Notes on operating safety

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

For your own safety, always observe the follow ing points when operating mobile communica tions equipment and especially your voice con trol system: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun

try in which you are driving.

R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control

system functions before starting the journey.

Operation Overview of operation of the Voice Control System on the multifunction steering wheel

The Voice Control System is operational approx imately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on.

1 Press the rocker switch up: starts the Voice Control System

2 Press the control:8 switches the sound off or on (ends the Voice Control System) Turn the control up/down: increases/ decreases the volume

206 Voice Control System

3 Press the rocker switch up:6 makes/ accepts a call Press the rocker switch down:~ rejects/ ends a call (ends the Voice Control System)

Conducting a dialog with the Voice Control System

# To start or continue a dialog: on the multi function steering wheel, press the rocker switch up. You can say a voice command after an acoustic signal.

# To correct an entry: say the Correction voice command.

# To select an entry from the selection list: say the line number or the contents.

# To browse the selection list: say the Next or Back voice command.

# To interrupt the dialog: say the Pause voice command.

# To cancel the dialog: say the Cancel voice command.

Operable functions

You can use the Voice Control System to operate the following equipment depending on the fea tures: R Telephone R Text messages R Navigation R Address book R Radio R Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB

and Bluetooth audio) R Vehicle

Overview of types of voice command

A distinction is made between the following voice commands: R Global voice commands can be said at any

time and regardless of the current applica tion, e.g. the voice commands Navigate to, Call or Text message to.

R Application-specific voice commands are only available for the active application.

Once the Voice Control System is started an autocue is shown. Apart from the available voice commands for the application currently active, this also cites example voice commands for other applications which are not active. In this way, you will be familiar more quickly with the available voice commands. The list can be scrol led or it can be operated by speech or the con troller/touchpad.

Information on the language setting

You can change the language of the Voice Con trol System via the system language settings. If the set system language is not supported by the Voice Control System, English will be selected. The Voice Control System is available in English, French, Portuguese and Spanish.

Voice Control System 207

Using the Voice Control System effectively Features of audible help functions

You receive information and help for the follow ing topics: R Optimum operation: say the brief instruc-

tion voice command. R Current application: on the multifunction

steering wheel, press the rocker switch up and say the Help voice command. R Continued dialog: say the Help voice com

mand during a voice dialog. R Specific function: say voice commands for

the desired function, e.g. Help telephone.

Notes on how to improve speech quality

If the Voice Control System does not understand you: R only operate the Voice Control System from

the driver's seat. R say the voice commands coherently and

clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. R avoid loud noises that cause interference

while making a voice command entry, e.g. the blower.

A voice tag in the address book is not recog nized: R only create sensible address book entries in

the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur name and first name in the correct field.

R do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary spaces or special characters.

If a station list entry is not recognized: R say the Read out station list voice command.

Essential voice commands Overview of switch voice commands

Switch voice commands can be used to open certain applications. The voice command selec tion can be used regardless of the application that is currently active.

Switch voice commands

Voice command Function

Navigation To switch to navigation mode

Map To switch to map display

208 Voice Control System

Voice command Function

Address book To switch to address book

Telephone To switch to telephone mode

Text message To switch to text messages

Radio To switch to radio mode

Media To switch to media mode

USB To switch to USB

Memory card To switch to memory card

Internet application To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up once using the mul timedia system prior to use.

Mercedes-Benz Apps To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps

Connect To switch to Internet mode

Vehicle menu To switch to vehicle settings

System settings menu To switch to system settings

Voice Control System 209

Overview of navigation voice commands

Using navigation voice commands, you can enter POIs or conventional addresses and make impor tant navigation settings directly.

Navigation voice commands

Voice command Function

Navigate to

Universal search for all types of destinations. A search is conducted in the address book contacts, the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street or house number, can be changed.

Address in Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France

Home Starts navigation to home address

Work Starts navigation to your workspace

POI Destination entry for a POI, e.g. the POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is performed in the navigation database and on the Internet.

POI online search Conducts a POI search on the Internet only

Navigate to contact Destination entry to a contact in the address book

210 Voice Control System

Voice command Function

Enter country Enter city Enter district Enter street Enter intersection Enter house number Enter ZIP code

Enters a country/city/district/street/intersection/house number/ZIP code

Nearest restaurant Nearest parking lot Nearest rest area with restrooms Nearest gas station

Searches for nearby restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations

Restaurant along the route Parking along the route Rest area with restrooms along the route Gas stations along the route

Searches for restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations along the route

Voice Control System 211

Voice command Function

Restaurant at destination Parking at destination Rest area with restrooms at destination Gas station at destination

Searches for restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations at the desti nation

Last destinations Selects a destination from the list of last entered destinations

Alternative routes Switches route guidance to another route

Start route guidance Starts route guidance after entering a valid destination

Cancel route guidance Cancels route guidance

Guidance instructions on Guidance instructions off

Switches the route guidance voice output on/off

Show traffic map Hide traffic map

Switches the traffic map on/off

Switch on POI symbols Switch off POI symbols

Switches the POI symbols display on the map on/off

212 Voice Control System

Overview of telephone voice commands

You can use the telephone voice commands to make phone calls or search through the address book.

Telephone voice commands

Voice command Function

Call Makes a phone call. All address book names are available.

Search for contact Searches for and displays a contact. All address book names are available.

Outgoing calls Displays the last call

Redial Selects the last phone number dialed

Overview of radio voice commands

Radio voice commands can also be used when the radio application is running in the back ground.

Voice Control System 213

Radio voice commands

Voice command Function

Station To call up receivable or saved stations

To enter a frequency directly

Next station To switch to the next available station

Previous station To switch to the previous station

Save station To save a station in the station list

Show station list To display the names of all receivable stations

Read out station list To listen to the names of all receivable stations

Traffic information on Traffic information off

To switch the traffic information service on/off

Radio info on Radio info off

To switch information about the current station on/off

Overview of media player voice commands

Media player voice commands can also be used when the media player runs in the background.

214 Voice Control System

Media player voice commands

Voice command Function

Play Play Play Play Play Play

The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur ing the search.

Media search Media search Media search Media search Media search Media search

The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur ing the search.

Voice Control System 215

Voice command Function

Show all albums Show all artists Show all composers Show all genres Show all tracks Show all playlists

Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for.

Next track To select the next track

Previous track To select the previous track

Random playback on Random track list off

To switch the random track list on/off

Overview of message voice commands

Text messages can be created, edited and lis tened to using the message voice commands.

216 Voice Control System

Message voice commands

Voice command Function

Text message to To create a message. All address book names are available.

Reply To reply to a message

Forward text message To forward a message

Overview of vehicle voice commands

You can use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle settings.

Vehicle voice commands

Voice command Function

Ambient light menu To display ambient light settings

Ambient light "blue" To switch ambient light to blue

Display and styles menu To show display settings

Assistance menu To display assistance settings

Voice Control System 217

Voice command Function

Scent menu To display fragrance settings

Energy flow To display energy flow settings

Ionization menu To display ionization settings

Climate control menu To display climate control settings

Automatic climate control driver on To switch on the automatic climate control settings on the driver's side

Light menu To display light settings

Massage menu To display massage settings

Massage driver's seat on To switch on the massage function for the driver's seat

Massage driver's seat off To switch off the massage function for the driver's seat

Outside temperature To display the outside temperature

Engine data To display engine data

Seats menu To display seat adjustment settings

Seat heating front passenger level "2" To set the seat heating for the front passenger seat to level 2

218 Voice Control System

Voice command Function

Consumption menu To display consumption

Vehicle data To display vehicle data

Voice Control System 219

Overview and operation Overview of the multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

1 Touch Control Multimedia system button group on the steering wheel (/ page 202)

2 Media display 3 Main function button group (/ page 224) 4 Touchpad 5 Controller

Adjusts the volume (/ page 227)

Switches the sound on/off (/ page 226) For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per formance exhaust system: Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches the multimedia system on/off

6 button Switches multimedia system on/off For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per formance exhaust system: Sets the volume of the AMG Performance exhaust system

7 Controller

Notes on the media display

* NOTE Scratches on the display

The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss surface. There is a risk of it becoming scratched. # Avoid touching the display. # Observe the notes on cleaning.

220 Multimedia system

Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 330). Automatic temperature-controlled switch- off feature: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The display may then switch off completely for a while. % If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it

may be difficult to read the display.

Central control elements overview

1 Touch Control 2 Controller 3 Touchpad

Touch Control

Operating Touch Control

# Operate the multimedia system with Touch Control2 and associated buttons1 and 3.

Calling up the main functions # Press button1. or # Press button3 repeatedly until the main

functions are shown.

Calling up favorites # Press button1.

Multimedia system 221

# Swipe down on Touch Control2.

Opening and closing a list # To open: press Touch Control2. # To close: press button3. or # Swipe right on Touch Control2.

Selecting a menu item # Swipe up, down, left or right on Touch Con

trol2. # Press Touch Control2.

Moving the digital map # Swipe in any direction.

Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control Multimedia system: 4 System 5w Input 5 Touch Control Sensitivity # Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

Operating the controller

1 % button Press briefly: returns to the previous display Press and hold: calls up main functions

2 button Calls up the main functions

To call up favorites: when the main functions are displayed, slide controller3 down.

3 Controller

Controller operating options: # Turn3 counter-clockwise or clockwise. # Slide1 left or right. # Slide4 up or down. # Slide2 diagonally. # Press7 briefly or press and hold.

Touchpad

Activating/deactivating the touchpad Multimedia system: 4 System 5w Input # Activate O or deactivate the Touchpad.

Operating the touchpad

Requirements: R The touchpad is switched on (/ page 222).

222 Multimedia system

1 Touchpad 2 button

Calls up main functions and favorites 3 D button

Calls up the control menu of the last active audio source

4 % button Press briefly: returns to the previous display

You can navigate in menus and lists via touch- sensitive surface1 by using a single-finger swipe: # To open or close lists: swipe left or right. # To select the menu item: swipe up, down,

left or right. # Press touchpad1. # To move the digital map: swipe in any

direction.

Use the following functions with a two-finger swipe: # To call up main functions and favorites:

swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must start in the upper area of the touchpad.

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To call up the control menu of the last active audio source: swipe up with two fin gers. The swipe must start in the lower area of the touchpad.

Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad Multimedia system: 4 System 5w Input # Select Touchpad Sensitivity. # Select Fast, Medium or Slow. # To set the pressure sensitivity: switch

Touchpad Tap on O or off . If the function is switched on O, a tap on the touchpad is enough to select a menu item.

Handwriting recognition: switching the read- aloud function on/off Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Audio 5 System Feedback # Switch Read Out Handwriting Recognition on

O or off .

Multimedia system 223

Activating/deactivating haptic operating feedback on the touchpad Multimedia system: 4 System 5w Input The function supports you when making entries on the touchpad and when selecting menus. # Switch Haptic Operating Feedback on O or

off . When the function is activated, a tactile feed back in the form of a vibration is effected when the touchpad is operated.

Selecting a station and track using the touchpad # Press theD button on the touchpad. or # Swipe up with two fingers. The swipe must

start in the lower area of the touchpad. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected.

# Use one finger to swipe up or down. Radio: the previous or the next station is set. Media source: the previous or the next music track is selected.

# To hide the control menu: swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must start in the upper area of the touchpad.

Main functions

Calling up the main functions

1 button Calls up navigation

2 $ button Calls up the radio

3 button Calls up media

4 % button

Calls up the telephone 5 button

Sets vehicle functions

# Alternatively: press the button on the Touch Control, controller or the touchpad. The main functions are displayed.

# Select the main function.

Favorites

Overview of favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favorites in total. The following functions are available: R add pre-defined favorites from the follow

ing categories (/ page 225): - Navigation - Entertainment - Phone - Connect - Vehicle

224 Multimedia system

- System Settings R add your own favorites (/ page 225) R rename favorites (/ page 225). R move favorites (/ page 225). R delete favorites (/ page 225). R reset all favorites (/ page 225)

Calling up favorites # Press the button.

The main functions are displayed. # Navigate downwards once.

Navigating means: R Swiping on the Touch Control or the

touchpad R Sliding the controller

Leaving the favorites menu # Press the button.

Adding favorites

Adding predefined favorites # Press the button.

The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards twice. The Favorites menu appears.

# Select New Favorite. The categories are displayed.

# Select a category. The favorites are displayed.

# Select a favorite. # Store the favorite at the desired position.

If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Example: adding your own favorites # Select Vehicle. # Select Full Screen: Consumption. # Press and hold the button until the

favorites are displayed. # Store the favorite at the desired position.

If No function available for saving. is shown, the selected function cannot be added.

Renaming favorites # Press the button.

The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards once. # Select a favorite. # Navigate downwards once.

The Favorites menu appears. # Select Rename. # Enter the characters. # To confirm the entry: select.

Moving favorites # Press the button.

The main functions are displayed. # Navigate downwards once. # Select a favorite. # Navigate downwards once.

The Favorites menu appears. # Select Move. # Move the favorite to the desired position.

If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Deleting favorites # Press the button.

The main functions are displayed.

Multimedia system 225

# Navigate downwards once. # Select a favorite. # Navigate downwards once.

The Favorites menu appears. # To delete: select Delete. # Select Yes. # To restore all favorites: select Reset All.

A prompt appears. # Select Yes.

The favorites are reset to the factory set tings.

Switching the sound on/off

On the multifunction steering wheel

On the multimedia system

# To mute: press volume control1. The8 symbol appears in the status line of the display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted.

226 Multimedia system

# To switch on: change the media source or turn volume control1.

Adjusting the volume

Setting with the volume control

On the multifunction steering wheel On the multimedia system

# Turn volume control1. The volume of the current radio or media source is set. The volume of other audio sources can be adjusted separately. Adjust this in the following situations: R During a traffic announcement R During a navigation announcement

The volume of the navigation announce ment changes in accordance with the vol ume of the current media source. R During a telephone call R When entering or exiting a parking space

while using Active Parking Assist

Setting in the menu # Select System in the multimedia system. # Select Audio. # Select a volume setting. # Set the volume.

Entering characters

Using the character input function

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the

Multimedia system 227

traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Use the character input function in the following situations, for example: R Renaming a favorite R Entering a POI or address R Making a phone call

The following functions are available: R Selecting a character in the character bar R Writing a character on the touchpad

Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.

# On the Touch Control and controller: select the characters in the character bar. Depending on the target entry, the following characters are available: R The full set of characters is shown R Only those characters which are useful

for the current input string are shown Other characters are grayed out.

# On the touchpad: select the characters in the character bar.

or # Write the characters on the touch-sensitive

surface of the touchpad. Handwriting recognition supports you by means of character suggestions and a read- aloud function.

Examples of character entry: R Renaming a favorite R Entering a POI or an address using free or

step-by-step search R Entering a web address

Entering characters using the controller

Example: renaming favorites

# Call up the "Renaming favorites" function (/ page 225).

# To enter a character: turn3, slide4 and press the controller. The character is entered in the input line.

Use the following entry functions: % To delete a character: press the control

ler. To delete an entry: press and hold the controller until the entire entry is deleted.

228 Multimedia system

To switch to special characters and sym bols.

X To switch to upper-case or lower-case let ters.

B To switch the language.

v To switch to character entry on the touch pad.

% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level.

# To confirm the entry: select.

Example: entering a destination (navigation) # Enter the POI or address (/ page 243).

Entering characters on the touchpad

Requirements: R The touchpad is switched on (/ page 222). R The entered or selected character should be

read out: the handwriting recognition read- aloud function is switched on (/ page 223).

Example: renaming favorites

# Call up the "Renaming favorites" function (/ page 225).

# To enter a character: use your finger to write characters on the touchpad. The character is entered in the input line. If different interpretations are possible, charac ter suggestions are displayed.

# To select a character suggestion: swipe up or down on the touchpad.

# Resume character input. # To enter a space: swipe right when the cur

sor is located in the input line.

# To delete a character: swipe left when the cursor is located in the input line.

# To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. # To finish character entry: swipe upwards. or # Press the% button.

Example: entering a destination (navigation) # Enter the POI or address (/ page 243).

System settings Display

Configuring display settings Multimedia system: 4 System 5 G Display and Designs

Styles # Select Designs. # Select Sport, Classic or Progressive.

Adapting the ambient lighting for the style # Select Adjust Amb. Lighting.

Activate O or deactivate the function.

Multimedia system 229

This function adjusts the ambient lighting for the selected display style.

Setting the display brightness # Select Display Brightness. # Select a brightness value.

Switching the display off/on # To switch off: select Display Off. # To switch on: press a button, %, for

example.

Display design # Select Day/Night Design. # Select Automatic, Day Design or Night

Design.

Additional display area Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi tional information can be shown. The additional display area comprises the left-hand or right- hand third of the display. # Select Additional Disp. Area.

The following display content can be selected: R Dynamic R Navigation Map R Consumption R Time and Date

Time and date

Setting the time and date automatically Multimedia system: 4 System 5& Time and Date # Deactivate Manual Time Adjustment.

The time and date are set automatically for the selected time zone and summer time option.

% The correct time is required for the following functions: R Route guidance with time-dependent

traffic guidance. R Calculation of expected time of arrival.

Setting the time zone Multimedia system: 4 System 5& Time and Date 5 Time Zone: The list of countries is displayed. # Select a country #.

Depending on the country, time zones are displayed.

# Select a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time Zone:.

Setting summer time The Automatic Daylight Saving Time and Day- light Saving Time options cannot be selected in all countries. Multimedia system: 4 System 5& Time and Date

Automatically # Switch Automatic Daylight Saving Time on

O or off .

230 Multimedia system

Manually # Deactivate Automatic Daylight Saving

Time. # Select Daylight Saving Time. # Select On or Off.

Setting the time and date format Multimedia system: 4 System 5& Time and Date 5 Set Format # Set the date and time format #.

Setting the time manually

Requirements: R The Manual Time Adjustment function is

switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 System 5& Time and Date 5 Set Time # Set the hours. # Navigate to the right to set the minutes. # Set the minutes.

# Confirm changes when exiting the menu.

The date is set automatically via GPS.

Connectivity

Switching transmission of the vehicle posi tion on/off Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Connectivity # Select Transmit Vehicle Pos.. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Bluetooth

Information about Bluetooth

Bluetooth technology is a standard for short- range wireless data transfer up to approximately 32.8 ft (10 m).

You can use Bluetooth to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the fol lowing functions, for example: R Hands-free system with access to the follow

ing options:

- contacts (/ page 274) - call lists (/ page 276) - text message (/ page 277) R Internet connection (/ page 291) R Listening to music via Bluetooth audio R Transferring business cards (vCards) into the

vehicle

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. % Internet connection via Bluetooth is not

available in all countries.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

Requirements: R Deactivate Bluetooth: Apple CarPlay is not

active.

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Connectivity # Activate O or deactivate Bluetooth.

Multimedia system 231

If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask ing whether Bluetooth should be deactivated. # Select Yes.

Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth is deactivated.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi connection overview You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or other network devices. The following connection options are available: R Wi-Fi connection

The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or a tablet PC is established. R Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook can be connected, for example.

To establish a connection, you can use the fol lowing methods: R WPS PIN

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a PIN. R WPS PBC

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made by pressing a button (push button). R Security key

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a security key.

Setting up Wi-Fi

Requirements: R The device to be connected supports one of

the three means of connection described (/ page 232).

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Connectivity

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Switch Wi-Fi on O or off .

If Wi-Fi is deactivated , communication via Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also means that a connection to the HERMES communication module cannot be estab

lished. Then functions such as dynamic route guidance with Live Traffic Information are not available.

Connecting the multimedia system with a device via Wi-Fi This function is not available if a HERMES com munication module is installed. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ

depending on the device. Follow the instruc tions that are shown in the display. Further information (see the manufacturer's operat ing instructions).

# Select Internet Settings. # Select Search for Wi-Fi Networks.

Using a security key # Select a Wi-Fi network in the list. # Have the security key displayed on the device

to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

232 Multimedia system

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys tem.

# Confirm the entry with. % All devices support a security key as a

means of connection.

Using a WPS PIN # Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.

The multimedia system generates an eight- digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.

Using a button % This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre

quency of 2.4 GHz. # Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options

on the device to be connected. # Press the WPS button on the device to be

connected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Device has already been connected: # To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi

network in the list. # Activate Connect AutomaticallyO. # To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the

list. # Select Connect.

The connection is established again. These functions are possible when the device has already been connected to the Wi-Fi network.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements: R For connection by pressing a button: this

function is only available in a Wi-Fi frequency of 2.4 GHz.

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Connectivity

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi- Fi hotspot The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec tion established must be selected on the multi media system and on the device to be connec ted. # Select Set Up Hotspot. # Highlight Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

Generating a WPS PIN # Select Connect via WPS PIN Genera-

tion. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on

the device to be connected and confirm.

Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Select Enter WPS PIN.

Multimedia system 233

# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system.

# Select Continue.

Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the WPS button on the device to be

connected or select Connect. # Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con

nected. The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC # Select Connection via NFC.

# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of the vehicle (/ page 272).

# Select Done. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key: # Select Set Up Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key.

A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab lished, the new security key must be entered.

Managing COMAND Touch devices

Requirements: R The COMAND Touch app is installed on the

external device (e.g. tablet or smartphone).

R Wi-Fi is activated (/ page 232) and the mul timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi hot spot (/ page 233).

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 COMAND Touch

Connecting and authorizing a new device # Select Authorize a New Device. # Select Connect New Device. # Enter the security key in the external device.

The Please start COMAND Touch on your device and follow the instructions. message appears.

# Select Continue. # The connection request from the device

Accept. # Enter the PIN shown on the external device.

The device is authorized.

Authorising a connected device # Select Authorize a New Device.

The devices already connected are displayed.

234 Multimedia system

# Select Continue Using Connected Devices. The Please start COMAND Touch on your device and follow the instructions. message appears.

# Select Continue. # The connection request from the device

Accept. # Enter the PIN shown on the external device.

The device is authorized.

De-authorizing the device # Select an authorized device from the list.

A prompt will appear asking whether you would like to de-authorize the selected device.

# Select Yes. The device is de-authorized.

Activating/deactivating child safety lock

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Parental Control

Locking or unlocking an external device # Select an external device. # Select Lock.

The device connected via the COMAND Touch app is locked O or unlocked .

System language

Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan guages. If a language is not available, the naviga tion announcements will be in English.

Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Language # Set the language. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text

information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Naviga tion announcements are then also made in Arabic.

Setting the distance unit

Multimedia system: 4 System 5% Units # Select km or mi. # In the multifunction display of the Instrument

Display, switch the Additional Speedometer display on O.

Multimedia system 235

Data import and export

Data import/export function The following functions are possible: R Transferring data from one system or vehicle

to another system or vehicle. R Creating a backup copy of your personal data

and loading it again. R Protecting your personal data against unwan

ted export with PIN protection.

% Please note that the NTFS file system is not supported. The FAT32 file system is recom mended.

Importing/exporting data

* NOTE Loss of data due to premature removal

# Do not remove the data storage medium when data is being exported.

Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has

been started. R The SD card is inserted (/ page 296) or the

USB device is connected (/ page 297).

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 System Backup # Select Import Data or Export Data.

Importing # Select a data storage medium.

A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to overwrite the current data. If data originates from another vehicle, this is recog nized during data reading. The multimedia system is restarted once the data has been imported.

% Current vehicle settings can be edited after the import.

Exporting If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques ted.

# Enter the four-digit PIN. # Select a data storage medium.

The data is exported. The data export may take several minutes.

Activating/deactivating PIN protection

Requirements: To unlock the PIN: R There is an Internet connection. R A Mercedes me account exists at https://

me.secure.mercedes-benz.com. R The Personalization service is active

(/ page 237).

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 PIN Protection

Setting the PIN # Select Set PIN. # Enter a four-digit PIN. # Enter the four-digit PIN again.

If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.

236 Multimedia system

Changing the PIN # Select Change Settings. # Enter the current PIN. # Select Change PIN. # Set a new PIN.

Activating PIN protection for data export # Select Change Settings.

Confirm with the PIN. # Select Protect Data Export.

Activate O or deactivate the function.

Unblocking the PIN If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a single-use password sent to you via the Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the PIN protection. # Select Unblock PIN. # Enter the single-use password.

PIN protection is reset, and you can set a new PIN.

% The availability of this function is country dependent and may not be available in your country. Alternatively, you can have PIN protection reset at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter.

User profile

Setting a user profile Multimedia system: 4 System 5g Personalization

Displaying a user profile when starting If this function is active, a prompt appears when starting the system asking which user profile to use. # Select Display Profile Selection after Start. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Selecting a user profile # Select Guest Profile or individual profile #. % Some settings from the user profile are only

loaded when the vehicle is stationary or when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic synchronization Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the individual user profiles are synchronized on the multimedia system and on the server. This ensures that the latest user profiles are availa ble. # Select Automatic Synchronization. # Activate O or deactivate the function. % For more information about importing/

exporting user profiles (/ page 238).

Creating a user profile Multimedia system: 4 System 5g Personalization 5 Create Profile # Enter a name. # Selecta. The following information is saved in the user profile, for example: R System settings R Navigation and traffic information

The settings differ depending on the vehicle equipment.

Multimedia system 237

Importing/exporting a user profile

Requirements: R There is an Internet connection . R A Mercedes me account exists at https://

me.secure.mercedes-benz.com. R The Personalization service is active. R The function is available in your country.

Multimedia system: 4 System 5g Personalization 5 Manual Export/Import

Importing a user profile # Select Import Profiles from Server.

The The profile data import overwrites all existing profile data. Do you want to con- tinue? message appears.

# Select Yes. User profiles are imported.

Exporting a user profile # Select Export Profiles to the Server.

User profiles are exported.

% Only individual profiles can be imported or exported. The individual profiles are always collectively imported or exported.

% Certain settings, such as address book entries or previous destinations from the navigation system, are not exported.

Setting user profile options Multimedia system: 4 System 5g Personalization # Highlight a profile. # Select options. The following options are available: R Rename R Delete R Reset

% The guest profile cannot be deleted or renamed.

Software updates

Information on software updates The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available. The availability of this function is dependent on the country.

Depending on the source, you can perform various updates:

Source of the update

Update type

Updates via mobile phone

Navigation map, sys tem updates, Digital Operator's Manual

Updates via an exter nal storage medium, e.g. a USB flash drive

Navigation maps

% Software updates via mobile phone require an active Internet connection for the vehicle. This is not available in all countries. For fur ther information on connecting to the Inter net, see (/ page 291).

238 Multimedia system

Advantages of software updates Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol ogy is up-to-date. In order to constantly improve the quality of our services you will receive future software updates for your multimedia system, the Mercedes me connect services and your vehicle's communica tion module. These will be sent to you via the mobile phone connection in your vehicle and, as an option, installed automatically. You can moni tor the status of your software updates on the Mercedes me Portal and find information about potential innovations. Your advantages at a glance: R Conveniently receive software updates via

the mobile phone network R Improves the quality and availability of

Mercedes me connect services R Keeps your multimedia system and communi

cation module up-to-date

Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes- benz.com

Carrying out software updates

Requirements: R There is an Internet connection

(/ page 291). R For automatic software updates: your

vehicle has a permanently installed commu nication module.

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Software Update

Automatic software updates # Activate O Automatic Online Update.

The software updates will be downloaded and installed automatically. The current status of the software update is displayed.

Manual software updates # Switch off Automatic Online Update. # Select a software update from the list and

start the update.

Activating a software update # Restart the system.

Function of important system updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Please install these updates, otherwise the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. % If automatic online updates are activated,

the system updates will be downloaded auto matically (/ page 239).

As soon as a system update is available for download, a corresponding message appears on the media display. You have the following selection options: R Download

The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Details

Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later

Multimedia system 239

The system update can be downloaded man ually at a later time (/ page 239).

You will be informed when the download is com plete and the system update is ready for installa tion. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location

before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched on. R The engine is not running. R Notes and warnings have been read and

accepted. R The parking brake is applied.

If all requirements are met, the system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated during the installation and vehicle func tions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the multimedia system display. Con

sult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem.

Reset function

Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones

# Select Yes.

If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac tory settings during a reset. # Select Yes. # Enter the current PIN.

The PIN is reset. or # Select No.

The current PIN stays the same after reset ting.

% If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate the PIN protection for you.

A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes.

The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings.

Fit & Healthy ENERGIZING COMFORT

Overview of the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro gram Program overview R Refresh: Can make targeted changes to the

interior climate to refresh vehicle occupants. Cooling airflow and ionization purify the air. The vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colors and the seat is ventilated. R Warmth: Can increase the comfort level of

the vehicle occupants. The vehicle's panel, seat and steering wheel heating provide cozy

240 Multimedia system

warmth. The air is purified using ionization and a pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with warm light ing. R Vitality: Can counteract diminishing atten

tiveness in monotonous driving situations. Fast-paced music and a vitalizing massage provide invigorating stimulation for the vehi cle occupants. The air is purified using ioni zation and a pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with a stim ulating hue and the seat is ventilated. R Enjoyment: Can promote a positive mood in

the vehicle occupants as well as mental and physical regeneration. Moderately fast music is played and a massage program is activa ted. The air is purified using ionization and a pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with amicable lighting. R Well being: Can aid the physical and mental

relaxation of vehicle occupants. A back mas sage combined with local warmth provide relaxation. The air is purified using ionization and a pleasant fragrance is released. The audio player plays selections of calming

music and the vehicle interior is illuminated with pleasant lighting. R Training: Can counteract the onset of mus

cle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The exercises are demonstrated in short vid eos. The air is purified using ionization and a pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with lighting appropri ate to the exercise.

% Please note that the available programs and the associated functions depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equipment, fewer functions may be availa ble.

Starting the ENERGIZING Comfort program

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

% ENERGIZING Comfort is available approx imately five minutes after starting the multi media system.

Multimedia system: 4 Vehicle 5 ENERGIZING Comfort

Selecting a seat # Select Seat Selection. # Select the desired seat or All Seats O.

Starting a program # Select Refresh, Warmth, Vitality, Enjoyment

or Well-being.

The selected program will run for ten minutes.

Configuring a program # Call up further options for the desired

program. # Switch the functions included in the program

on O or off .

Starting training # Select Training. # Select Muscle Relaxation, Muscle Stimula-

tion or Balance. The selected training video starts and is dis played in the media display.

Multimedia system 241

# Select Full Screen: Video. The training video is displayed in full screen.

% For more information on pausing or skipping through videos, see (/ page 298).

If, during an active program, a function require ment is no longer met, a corresponding message appears. The active program is canceled.

Navigation Switching navigation on

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation

# Alternatively: press the button. The map appears and shows current vehicle position1.

% If a climate control setting is changed, a cli mate bar appears briefly.

Showing/hiding the navigation menu

Requirements: R The map shows the vehicle's current posi

tion.

242 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation

# To show: swipe left on the touchpad or the Touch Control.

or # Slide the controller to the left. # To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or the

Touch Control.

or # Slide the controller to the right. % To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or

slide to the left or right as many times as necessary.

Destination entry

Entering a POI or address

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road

and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Requirements: R For the online search: Mercedes me con

nect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes

me Portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me Multimedia system: 4 Navigation # Show the navigation menu. # Select Enter Destination .

Multimedia system 243

The state or province in which the vehicle is located is set1. There are two available methods of destination entry: R Free search2 R Search step-by-step3

Method 1: free search # Enter the POI or address in2. The entries

can be made in any order. During destination entry, suggestions are made by the multimedia system. A selection of destinations appears in a list.

Enter these address elements, for example: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name R POI category, e.g. Gas Station R City, POI name

# To switch to handwriting recognition: selectv5.

# Write the character on the touchpad. # To switch to character selection: press the

% button. or # Press the touchpad. # To delete an entry: select%4 (if avail

able). Use the following options: R Press briefly: deletes the last character

entered or the last suggestion adopted. R Press and hold: deletes the entire entry.

# To set the language: selectB8.

# Select the language.

% This function is useful for countries in which several character sets are supported. An example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and Latin characters.

# To call up the online search function: select Online Search6. Once an Internet connection is established, a list appears. It shows online destinations related to the previous entry. The online destination is supplied by an Inter net provider.

# Select the online destination. or # Enter the online destination or a 3 word

address in the input line. % Enter a 3 word address (/ page 248).

Online search is not available in all coun tries.

# To call up the list: press the% button. or

244 Multimedia system

# If the top line of the character bar is highligh ted, navigate upwards.

# Select the destination in the list. # To adopt a destination: select7 Select

Destination . If there are several listings for a destination, a list appears.

# Select the destination. The destination address is shown.

Method 2: search step-by-step # Press% button. or # If the top line of the character bar is highligh

ted, navigate upwards. The character bar is hidden. City or ZIP is highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for POI, are available.

# Select City or ZIP. The character bar appears.

# Enter the city or the ZIP code. During destination entry, suggestions are made by the multimedia system. A selection of destinations appears in a list.

The address entries can be made in any order, for example: R City or ZIP, Street, House No.

Enter an intersecting street, if available. R Street, City or ZIP R POI, e.g. Gas Station, City or ZIP

% During destination entry, use the following functions: R Switch to handwriting recognition. R Switch to character selection. R Delete an entry.

An entry, e.g. POI, can be deleted with in a step-by-step search. Navigate to the left to do so. R Call up the online search function (if

available). R Call up a list.

The functions are described in the free search.

# To change the state/province: select the state or the province.

# Enter the state or the province. You only need to enter the first character.

# Select the state or the province in the list. # To change the country: select the country. # Enter the country. You only need to enter the

first character. # Select the country on the list. # To adopt a destination: select Select Desti-

nation. If there are several listings for a destination, a distance-orientated list appears.

# Select the destination. The destination address is shown.

Selecting previous destinations Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Previous and Other Destinations # Select Previous Destinations. # Select the destination.

The destination address is shown. or

Multimedia system 245

# If favourites have been saved already (/ page 258), select From My Favorites.

# Select the favourite. The destination address is shown.

Selecting a POI Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Previous and Other Destinations 5 POIs # Select the category. or # Select All Categories and the category.

If route guidance is not active: the search begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle position. The list is sorted by distance in ascending order. The POIs show the following information: R Name of POI R Linear distance to the POI R The direction of the linear distance to the

POI (arrow) is displayed when searching for the vehicle's current position

# Select the POI. # Route guidance is active: select the search

position prior to choosing a POI (see exam ple).

# If intermediate destinations are set, these can also be selected as the search position after selecting Near Destination.

Filtering displays for POIs # Enter the search term in Search:.

The results list shows relevant POIs. # Select.

The first POI in the list is highlighted. # Select the POI.

Example: setting the search position for the parking category during active route guid ance # Select In the Vicinity, Near Destination or

Along the Route. The list shows the located POIs or opens an overview of the route destination after selecting Near Destination.

# Select the POI.

# Select Near Destination: select the inter mediate destination or the destination.

Starting an automatic gas station search

Requirements: R The automatic gas station search is activated

O (/ page 252).

Driving situation Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level. The Reserve Fuel Do you want to start a search for surrounding gas stations? message is shown. # Select Yes.

The automatic gas station search begins. The available gas stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.

# Select the gas station. The address of the gas station is displayed.

# If route guidance is not active, select Start Route Guidance. The selected gas station is set as the desti nation. Route guidance begins.

246 Multimedia system

or # If route guidance is active, select Start New

Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point. Start New Route Guidance: the selected gas station is set as a new destination. The previ ous destinations and intermediate destina tions are deleted. Route guidance to the gas station begins. Set as Next Way Point: the selected gas sta tion is set as the next intermediate destina tion. Route guidance begins.

# If there are already four intermediate des tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The selected gas station is entered into posi tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.

Entering an intermediate destination

Requirements: R A destination is entered.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Way Points and Info # Select Search for Way Point. # Enter the intermediate destination as a POI

or address (/ page 243). # Select the intermediate destination. # Select Set as Destination. or # Select an intermediate destination using Enter Destination during route guid ance.

# Select Set as Next Way Point after entering the destination.

Editing intermediate destinations

Requirements: R The destination and at least one intermediate

destination have been entered.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Way Points and Info # To call up the map: highlight the destination

or the intermediate destination.

# Select Map . # Move the map (/ page 262). # Select destination on the map (/ page 249). # To change the order of destinations: high

light the destination or the intermediate des tination.

# Select Move . # Move the intermediate destination to the

desired position. # Press the Touch Control, the controller or the

touchpad. # To delete a destination: highlight the desti

nation or the intermediate destination. # Select Delete.

Calculating a route with intermediate desti nations

Requirements: R The destination and at least one intermediate

destination have been entered.

Multimedia system 247

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Way Points and Info # Select Start New Route Guidance.

The route is calculated with the set inter mediate destinations.

Selecting a contact for destination entry

Requirements: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime

dia system (/ page 269). R The "Navigate to contact" online service is

available and activated.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Previous and Other Destinations 5 Contacts # Select the contact.

The contact details are displayed. # Select the address.

The Please Wait... message appears. The search is carried out online.

# Select the destination.

Filtering displays for contacts # Enter a name or telephone number, for exam

ple, into the search field. # Select.

The first contact in the list is highlighted. # Select the contact. # Select the address.

Entering geo-coordinates Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Previous and Other Destinations 5 Geo-coordinates # Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi

tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. The map shows the position.

# Confirm the entry. # To calculate a route: select Start Route

Guidance. # If a route has already been created, select

Start New Route Guidance or Set as Way Point.

Entering the destination as a 3 word address

Requirements: R Searching for a destination using 3 word

addresses is possible in the online search (/ page 243). R There is an Internet connection.

% Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in all countries.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Enter Destination # Select Online Search. # Enter the destination address as a 3 word

address. Separate each of the words with a full stop. The search results are displayed.

# Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated.

248 Multimedia system

% 3 word addresses from what3words are an alternative addressing system for multilin gual georeferencing of global locations with a resolution of three meters. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do not have a building address such as a street and house number, for example. The Empire State Building has this language dependent 3 word address: R English: parade.help.bleat R French: commun.verbe.bisquer R Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca

3 word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice for most routine appli cations. You can convert addresses to 3 word addresses and back again: R At the website https://what3words.com R In the what3words apps

Selecting a destination on the map Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options # Select Map Menu. or # If the map is displayed in full screen mode,

press the central control element. The map menu appears.

# Select "move map" in map menu2 (/ page 261).

# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control or touchpad.

or # Slide the controller in any direction.

The map moves in the corresponding direc tion under the crosshair. The more you move your finger away from the starting position on the touchpad, the faster the map moves.

# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad. If several destinations are located around the crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and roads.

If a destination is located exactly on the crosshair, the destination address is dis played.

# Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown.

Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D # Highlight Map Orientation: 2D/3D. # Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the

controller. The map will be displayed in the selected map orientation.

Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of the map # Select Traffic Messages for the Vicinity.

The map appears. # Swipe left or right on the touchpad. or # Slide the controller to the left or right.

The previous or next traffic incident is high lighted on the map. Information on the traffic incident is displayed.

Multimedia system 249

% Traffic reports are not available in all coun tries.

Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map # Select POIs in the Vicinity. # Swipe left or right on the touchpad. or # Slide the controller to the left or right.

The previous or next POI is highlighted on the map. The name or the address is shown.

# To filter the display by POI category: swipe down on the Touch Control or the touchpad.

or # Slide the controller down. # Select the POI category. % User Defined allows personal POI symbols to

be selected (/ page 263).

Route

Calculating a route

Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown.

# If route guidance is not active, select Start Route Guidance. The route to the destination is calculated. The map shows the route. Route guidance then begins.

or # If route guidance is active, select Start New

Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point. Start New Route Guidance: the selected des tination address is set as a new destination. The previous destinations and intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Set as Next Way Point: the selected destina tion address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins.

Taking alternative routes into consideration # Select an alternative route (/ page 252).

Other menu functions # To save the destination: select Store

in "Previous Destinations". # To display on the map: select Map. # To call a telephone number: select Call (if available).

# To call up an Internet address: select www (if available).

Selecting a route type Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position # Select Route Settings. # Select the route type.

If route guidance is active, the new route is calculated with the new route type. If route guidance is not active, the next route is calculated with the new route type.

You can choose from the following route types: R Eco Route

250 Multimedia system

An economical route is calculated. The jour ney time may be somewhat longer than for quicker routes. The symbol for the current vehicle position is displayed in green. R Fast Route

A route with a quick journey time is calcula ted. R Short Route

A route with a short driving distance is calcu lated.

Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance can be switched on O or off for these route types. If Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance is switched on, Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance can be selected. The Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance and Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance settings are not available in every country. The settings enable the following: R Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance

The route is calculated with the currently set route type. Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account. Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries. R Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance

A prompt appears when a new route is detec ted with a shorter journey time based on traf fic reports. You can continue to use the cur rent route or use the dynamic route instead.

Selecting route options Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position 5 Avoid Options

Avoiding areas # Select Areas (/ page 264).

Avoiding highways, ferries, motorail trains, tunnels, unpaved roads # Select O or deselect avoid option.

Using toll roads # Select Use Toll Roads. # Select Cash or Electronic Billing or Off.

The route takes into account roads that require the payment of a usage fee (toll). If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into account.

The selected route options cannot always be implemented. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the avoid Ferries option is enabled. A message appears and you will hear a corresponding message.

Using carpool lanes # Select Number of Occupants in the Vehicle. # Select number.

When using carpool lanes, observe the appli cable legal requirements as well as any con ditions pertaining to when and where such lanes may be used. Carpool lanes may only be used if certain conditions are met.

These route options are not available in every country.

Multimedia system 251

Selecting notifications for the route Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Announcements # Switch an announcement on O or off . You can choose from the following announce ments: R Announce Traffic Warnings

This function is not available in all countries. R Announce Street Names

The multimedia system announces the names of the roads that will follow the upcoming change of direction. This function is not available in all countries and languages.

Displaying destination information

Requirements: R A destination is entered.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation # Select Way Points and Info.

The following information is displayed: R Intermediate destinations and destination

The route can also include up to four intermediate destinations. R Name, address R Remaining driving distance R Time of arrival

Selecting an alternative route Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position # Select Alternative Route.

The routes are displayed in accordance with the setting made in the route settings. The currently selected route is shown with a dark blue line.

# Select the alternative route.

Switching the automatic gas station search on or off Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options # Switch Reserve Fuel on O or off .

Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level is reached, a prompt appears asking whether you want to start searching for gas stations.

Using automatic gas station search

Requirements: The automatic gas station search is activated O (/ page 252). The prompt Reserve Fuel Do you want to start a search for surrounding gas stations? appears. # Select Yes.

The automatic gas station search begins. The available gas stations along the route or in the vicinity are displayed.

# Select the gas station. # When there is no route, the gas station is set

as the destination. or

252 Multimedia system

# When there is a route, the gas station is set as the next intermediate destination.

Starting the automatic service station search

Requirements: R ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest Rest

Area function are activated (/ page 157).

Driving situation The ATTENTION ASSIST Do you want to search for a rest area? message is shown. # Select Yes.

The service station search starts. The availa ble service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.

# Select the service station. The service station address is displayed.

# If route guidance is not active, select Start Route Guidance. The selected service station is set as a desti nation. Route guidance begins.

or

# If route guidance is active, select Start New Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point. Start New Route Guidance: the selected service station is set as a new destination. The previous destination and all intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the service station begins. Set as Next Way Point: the selected service station is set as the next intermediate desti nation. Route guidance begins.

Route guidance

Notes on route guidance

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving instructions. The following driving instructions can be used: R Navigation announcements R Route guidance displays R Lane recommendations

If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically.

Multimedia system 253

Driving instructions may differ from the actual road and traffic conditions if: R The route is diverted R The direction of a one-way street has been

changed

For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi tions. The route may differ from the ideal route due to the following: R Roadworks R Incomplete digital map data

Notes on GPS reception The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things on GPS recep tion. In certain situations GPS reception can be impaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. in tunnels or in parking garages.

Changing direction overview

There are three phases when changing direction: R Preparation phase

If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation announcement is issued, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".

The map appears in full-screen mode. R Announcement phase

The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 300 ft (100 m)". The display is split into two parts. The map is displayed on the left; on the right, there is a detailed image of the intersection or a 3D image of the upcoming change of direction. R Change-of-direction phase

The multimedia system announces the immi nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Now turn right". The display is split into two parts. The vehicle has successfully changed direc tion when the light-color bar on the right drops down to 0 feet (0 m) and the current vehicle position symbol has reached the highlighted change-of-direction point. When the change of direction is complete, the map appears in full-screen mode.

% Changes of direction are also shown in the Instrument Display.

254 Multimedia system

Lane recommendations overview This display appears for multi-lane roads. If the digital map contains the relevant data, the multimedia system can display lane recommen dations for the next two changes of direction.

1 Recommended lane 2 Possible lane 3 Lanes not recommended

The following lanes are displayed: R Recommended lane1

In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that. R Possible lane2

In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction. R Lane not recommended3

In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without chang ing lane.

During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. % Lane recommendations can also be dis

played in the Instrument Display and in the Head-up Display.

Overview of destination reached Once the destination is reached, you will see the checkered flag. Route guidance is finished. When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destina

tion flag with the number of your inter mediate destination. After this, route guidance is continued.

Switching navigation announcements on/off

Requirements: R Route guidance is active.

# To switch off: press the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel during a navigation announcement (/ page 226).

or # Press the volume control on the center con

sole during a navigation announcement (/ page 226). The Voice Guidance has been deactivated. message appears.

or # Show the navigation menu (/ page 242). # Select! Voice Guidance .

The symbol changes to#. # To activate: select# Voice Guidance .

The current navigation announcement is played.

Multimedia system 255

% In the following situations, navigation announcements are switched on automati cally: R A new route guidance is started. R The route is recalculated.

% You can add and call up this function as a favorite under Voice Guidance On/Off.

Switching navigation announcements on/off during a phone call # Select System. # Select Audio. # Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-

ments. # Switch Voice Guidance During Call on O or

off .

Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements

Requirements: R Route guidance is active.

# On the multifunction steering wheel or on the multimedia system: turn the volume

control on the multifunction steering wheel during a navigation announcement.

or # Turn the volume control on the center con

sole during a navigation announcement (/ page 227).

% In the following situations, the volume is raised to the maximum volume or lowered to the minimum volume: R A new route guidance is started. R The route is recalculated.

% The minimum volume can be individually set at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Via system settings: select System. # Select Audio. # Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-

ments. # Select Voice Guidance Volume. # Set the volume. # To switch audio fadeout on/off during

navigation announcements: select System. # Select Audio.

# Select Navigation and Traffic Announce- ments.

# Switch Audio Fadeout During Voice Guidance on O or off .

Repeating navigation announcements

Requirements: R A route has already been created. R Route guidance is active.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation # Select! Voice Guidance. # Select# Voice Guidance.

The current navigation announcement is repeated.

% You can add and call up this function as a favorite under Repeat Voice Guidance.

Canceling route guidance

Requirements: R A route has already been created. R Route guidance is active.

256 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation # Select% Cancel Route Guidance.

Overview of route guidance to an off-road destination An off-road destination is within the digital map. The map contains no roads that lead to the des tination. You can enter geo-coordinates or a three word address for off-road destinations on the map. Route guidance guides you for as long as possi ble with navigation announcements and displays on roads that are known to the multimedia sys tem. Shortly before you reach the last known position on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the direction arrow" announcement. The display shows a direction arrow and the linear distance to the destination.

Overview of route guidance from an off-road location to a destination Off-road position: the current vehicle position is located within the digital map on roads that are not available. When route guidance begins the following dis plays appear: R The Road Not Mapped message is shown. R A direction arrow showing the linear direc

tion to the POI.

When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal.

Overview of off-road status during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif ferences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.

If the vehicle is displayed as being offroad, the following displays appear: R The Road Not Mapped message R A direction arrow showing the linear direc

tion to the POI

When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal.

Destination

Saving the current vehicle position Multimedia system: 4 Navigation # If the map is displayed in full screen mode,

press the central control element. The map menu appears.

# Select1 on the map menu (/ page 261). The current vehicle position is saved to the "Previous destinations" memory.

Multimedia system 257

Storing a map position Multimedia system: 4 Navigation The map is in full-screen mode. # Press the Touch Control, the controller or the

touchpad. # Select "move map" in map menu2

(/ page 261). # Select a position on the map.

If multiple entries are available for a map position, a list appears.

# Highlight an entry. # Select Store in "Previous Destina-

tions" . The map position is saved to the "Previous destinations" memory.

Editing the previous destinations Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Previous and Other Destinations 5 Previous Destinations # Highlight one of the previous destinations.

# To save as a favorite: select Save My Favorite . The favorites are displayed.

# Move the favorite to the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

# To save as "Home" address: select Save as "Home" .

# To save as "Work" address: select Save as "Work" .

# To delete a single or all destinations: select Delete or Delete All. A prompt appears.

# Select Yes. # To display destination information: select Details.

Using external destinations External destinations can be received from the following sources: R Mercedes-Benz Apps R Door-to-door navigation with Companion app

(USA)

% Received destinations are saved in the previ ous destinations.

A prompt appears on the media display. # A destination has been received without

picture information: select Yes. # If route guidance is not active, select Start

Route Guidance. The route to the destination is calculated. The map shows the route. Route guidance then begins.

or # If route guidance is active, select Start New

Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point. Start New Route Guidance: the received des tination address is set as a new destination. The previous destinations and intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Set as Next Way Point: the received destina tion address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins.

258 Multimedia system

# A destination has been received with pic ture information: select Start Route Guid- ance. Route guidance starts.

Route guidance with current traffic reports

Traffic information overview Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic Information and are used for route guidance. This service is unavailable in some countries. There may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. Important information on Live Traffic Informa tion: R Current traffic reports are received via the

Internet connection. R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu

lar intervals. R The subscription information shows the sta

tus (/ page 259).

Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is immedi ately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traffic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports. If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi tion, you can have this service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Displaying subscription information

Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic

Information.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options The subscription expiration date is automatically displayed: R one month before the expiration date. R one week before the expiration date. R on the expiration date.

# To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub- scription Info. Depending on the status, one of the following messages appears: R the period of validity for the subscription

is displayed. R the subscription has expired.

% The subscription can be extended: R At an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center

Displaying the traffic map

Requirements: R For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is

equipped with a communication module fea turing an activated, integrated SIM card. R When the vehicle is started, the communica

tion module automatically establishes an Internet connection. Traffic information is made available shortly afterwards.

Multimedia system 259

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Menu # Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full

screen mode, press the Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad. The map menu appears.

# Activate O. The traffic map shows the following information, for example: R Traffic incidents, for example:

- Roadworks - Road blocks - Warning messages

The symbols for traffic incidents are dis played in color (on the route) or gray (off the route). R Traffic flow information:

- Traffic jam (red line) - Slow-moving traffic (orange line) - Heavy traffic (yellow line)

- Free-flowing traffic (green line) R Display for traffic delays on the route lasting

at least one minute R Warning message symbols:

- Symbol - Additional road safety notes when

approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the end of a traffic jam If the vehicle approaches a danger area on the route, a warning message is dis played on the map. A warning message may also be issued (/ page 261).

Displaying traffic incidents Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Content # Activate Traffic Incidents O.

Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis played.

Activating free flow and traffic display # Activate Free Flowing Traffic and Traffic

Delays O. % The traffic delay is displayed for the current

route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.

Displaying details # Displaying the traffic map (/ page 259). # Move the map (/ page 262). # When a traffic report symbol is under the

crosshair, press on the central control ele ment. The traffic report details are displayed.

or # Press on the central control element. # Select Information on Traffic Reports.

The map shows the traffic report symbols in the vicinity. Traffic report information is displayed in the status line: R Traffic report symbol

260 Multimedia system

R Reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic congestion R Warning message (highlighted in red)

# To select a traffic report symbol: select Next or Previous.

# Press on the central control element. The traffic report details are displayed.

Issuing hazard warnings Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Announcements # Activate O Announce Traffic Warnings.

Warning messages are issued and tailbacks which pose a risk are announced.

Map and compass

Map and compass overview

1 Saves the current vehicle position 2 Moves the map 3 Selects the map orientation and map view 4 Selects the function depending on the equip

ment: Sends a hazard warning via Car-to-X.

Filters the display of POIs in the vicinity according to POI category

5 Switches the display of personal POI sym bols on the map on or off

6 Switches one of the following displays on or off depending on the equipment: Weather information Satellite map Traffic incidents

7 Switches the traffic map display on or off

The map and satellite images are shown in globe projection. This allows for a realistic map display in all map scales. The map uses elevation model ing. Depending on the map data, important buildings in many cities are depicted realistically on the map in small map scales (e.g. 1/32 mi (20 m), 1/16 mi (50 m)). Other buildings are shown as models. % You can set the unit of measurement of the

map scale (/ page 235). If available, online information is displayed, e.g. parking garage occupancy.

Multimedia system 261

% Requirements: R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the

Mercedes me Portal. R The service has been activated at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

% The online information is not available in all countries.

If Display in COMAND is activated in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 176), speed limits and overtak ing restrictions are displayed on the map. % Company logos displayed on the map are

trademarks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself.

Setting the map scale

Requirements: R The map is shown.

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation # To zoom in: swipe down on the Touch Con

trol. or # Turn the controller counter-clockwise. or # Move two fingers apart on the touchpad. # To zoom out: swipe up on the Touch Control. or # Turn the controller clockwise. or # Move two fingers together on the touchpad.

Moving the map Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Menu # Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full

screen mode, press the central control ele ment. The map menu appears.

# Select "Move map" in map menu2 (/ page 261).

# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control or touchpad.

or # Slide the controller in any direction.

The map moves in the corresponding direc tion under the crosshair. The further you move your finger away from the starting posi tion on the touchpad, the faster the map moves.

262 Multimedia system

Selecting the map orientation Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Menu # Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full

screen mode, press the central control ele ment. The map menu appears.

# In map menu3 , select N, 2D or 3D(/ page 261). R N: the 2D map view is displayed so that

north is always at the top. R 2D: the 2D map view is aligned to the

direction of travel. R 3D: the 3D map view is aligned to the

direction of travel.

Selecting POI symbols Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Content POIs include gas stations and hotels which can be displayed as symbols on the map, for exam ple. Not all POIs are available everywhere.

# Select POI Symbols. The # dot indicates the current setting. Standard displays symbols of predefined cat egories on the map. User Defined allows you to personally select the symbols for the available categories. None switches the display off.

# Select a setting. # User Defined: select categories.

The POI symbols of the selected categories are displayed O or not displayed .

Selecting the display of text information in the map Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Text Information # Select text information.

Current Street shows the street you are cur rently driving on at the bottom of the display. When the map is moved, the following infor mation appears under the crosshair: R Street name

R POI name R Area name

Geo-coordinates displays the following infor mation: R Longitude and latitude R Elevation

The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation. R Number of satellites from which a signal

can be received When the map is moved, this information does not appear.

Climate Control displays the current climate control settings. None switches the display off.

Displaying the next intersecting street

Requirements: R Route guidance is not active.

Multimedia system 263

Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options # Activate O Next Intersecting Street.

The name of the next intersecting street will be displayed at the upper edge of the display.

Displaying the map version Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options # Select Map Version. # Select Details. % Information about new versions of the digital

map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Overview of avoiding an area You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid. The route can include an area that is to be avoi ded in the following situations: R the destination is located in an area that is to

be avoided R if freeways are located within the area that is

to be avoided

Freeways are always taken into account for the route. R there is no sensible alternative route

Avoiding a new area Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position 5 Avoid Options 5 Areas # Select Avoid New Area. # To search for an area via the map: select

Using Map. # Move the map. or # To search for an area using an address:

select Address Entry. # Enter the address. # Select Select Destination.

The map appears. # To display an area: press the Touch Control,

the touchpad or the controller. A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided.

# To change the size of the area: swipe up or down on the Touch Control or the touchpad.

or # Slide the controller up or down.

The map scale is enlarged or reduced and changes the size of the area.

# To set the area: press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the controller. The area is entered into the list.

Changing an area Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position 5 Avoid Options 5 Areas # Highlight an area in the list. # Select Edit.

Moving the area on the map # Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control

or touchpad. or # Slide the controller in any direction.

264 Multimedia system

Changing the size of the area # To start: press the Touch Control, the touch

pad or the controller. # To change: swipe up or down on the Touch

Control or the touchpad. or # Slide the controller up or down. # To stop: press the Touch Control, the touch

pad or the controller.

Taking the area for the route into account # Avoid O an area in the list.

If route guidance is active, a new route is cal culated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance.

Deleting one or all areas Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position 5 Avoid Options 5 Areas # Highlight an area in the list. # Select Delete or Delete All.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. One or all areas are deleted.

Map data update overview

Updating at the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conven tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with up-to-date map data. Informa tion about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have updates to the digital map imple mented there. % Additional costs can be incurred in this proc

ess.

Online map update The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update map data. % The online map update service is not availa

ble in all countries.

The following options are available for the update: R The automatic map update updates map data

for one region. For automatic map updates Automatic Online Update must be activated in the sys tem settings (/ page 239). R The manual map update updates map data

for several or all regions.

Further information on the online map update is available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at https://www.mercedes.me.

Overview of map data Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac tory. Depending on the country, map data for your region is either pre-installed or the map data is supplied on a data storage medium. If the map data on your vehicle has been instal led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you do not need to enter the activation code. For map data that you have purchased in the form of a data storage medium, you must enter the accompanying activation code.

Multimedia system 265

% If you save the map data on a data storage medium with the online map update service, no entry is required. The activation code is stored on the data storage medium during the downloading process.

Observe the following when entering the activa tion code: R The activation code can be used for one vehi

cle R The activation code is not transferable R The activation code has six digits

In the event of the following problems, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: R The multimedia system does not accept the

activation code R You have lost the activation code

Displaying the compass Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5 Route and Position # Select Compass.

The compass display shows the following information: R the current direction of travel with bear

ing (360 format) and compass direction R longitude and latitude coordinates in

degrees, minutes and seconds R height (rounded) R number of GPS satellites from which a

signal can be received

Setting the map scale automatically Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options The map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed. For journeys in cities with detailed city models, a map view from the driver's perspective is used. # Switch Auto Zoom on O or off .

% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually for a short time. The set ting is reset automatically after a few sec onds.

Displaying the satellite map Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Content # Switch Satellite Map on O or off . or # If satellite map display6 is available in the

map menu, switch it on O or off (/ page 261). Switched on O: satellite maps are displayed in map scales of 2 mi (2 km) or less. Switched off : no satellite maps are dis played.

% Satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries.

Displaying weather information

Requirements: R Mercedes me connect is available.

266 Multimedia system

R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me Multimedia system: 4 Navigation 5Z Options 5 Map Content # Activate Weather Information O. or # If weather information display6 is available

in the map menu, activate O(/ page 261) it. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

% Weather information is not available in all countries.

Telephone Telephony

Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com

munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Multimedia system 267

Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone

2 Signal strength of the mobile phone network for the currently connected and selected mobile phone

3 Battery status of the currently connected and selected mobile phone

4 (telephone ready) orw (call active)

5 Contacts (/ page 274) 6 Recent Calls (/ page 276) 7 Text Message 8 One mobile phone connected: Active Call.

Two mobile phones connected: changes view between telephone 1 and 2 or Active Call

9 Devices (/ page 269)

A Options Symbols1 to4 are not shown until after a mobile phone has been connected to the multi media system. The symbols depend on your mobile phone and your mobile phone network provider.

268 Multimedia system

Bluetooth profile overview

Bluetooth profile of the mobile phone

Function

PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)

Contacts are auto matically displayed in the multimedia sys tem

MAP (Message Access Profile)

Message functions can be used

Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime

dia system via Bluetooth (/ page 269). R Two mobile phones are connected with the

multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode) (/ page 270).

Information on telephony The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R There is insufficient network coverage in the

area R You move from one GSM or UMTS transmit

ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no communication channels are free R The SIM card used is not compatible with the

network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged

into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth tel ephony)

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia

system (/ page 231).

Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Devices

Searching for a mobile phone # Select Connect New Device. # Select Start Search on System.

The available mobile phones are displayed. If a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated by the# symbol.

Connecting a mobile phone (authorization using Secure Simple Pairing) # Select the mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

Multimedia system 269

# If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.

Connecting a mobile phone (authorization by entering a passkey) # Select the mobile phone. # Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi

nation as a passkey. # On the multimedia system: enter the pass

key and selecta. # On the mobile phone: enter the passkey

again and confirm. % Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized

on the multimedia system. Authorized mobile phones are reconnected automatically.

Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone mode)

Requirements: R At least one mobile phone is already connec

ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth.

Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Devices # Select Connect New Device. # Select Start Search on System.

The available mobile phones are displayed. # Select the mobile phone. # Answer the How would you like to connect

the new device? prompt. # To replace the currently connected

mobile phone: select Phone 1. The currently connected mobile phone is replaced by the new mobile phone.

or # To connect the second mobile phone:

select Phone 2. The new mobile phone is connected as Phone 2. If two mobile phones have already been connected, the second telephone is replaced by the new mobile phone.

or # To use the mobile phone as an audio

source: select Audio Source (/ page 303).

% A mobile phone can be operated both as an audio source as well as telephone in parallel.

% The type of connection for the connected mobile phone, for example as Phone 1, Phone 2 or as Audio Source, can be rede fined at any time. (/ page 270).

Functions of the mobile phone in two phone mode

Functions overview

Mobile phone in the foreground

Mobile phone in the background

Full range of func tions

Incoming calls

Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode)

Requirements: R The mobile phones are authorized

(/ page 269).

270 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Devices # In the device overview, select a mobile phone

which has already been authorized and set as Phone 1 or Phone 2.

After interchanging the mobile phones, the mobile phone in the foreground is replaced by the mobile phone in the background.

1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone

2 Connects a mobile phone as Phone 1 3 Connects a mobile phone as Phone 2 4 Connects a mobile phone as Audio Source 5 Disconnects a mobile phone(/ page 271) 6 De-authorizes a mobile phone(/ page 271)

% If a new mobile phone is connected and defined as Phone 1, for example, this over writes the previously connected mobile phone in the foreground of the system.

Disconnecting a mobile phone Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Devices # Select thei symbol in the line of the

mobile phone. The disconnection of the mobile phone takes place without a confirmation prompt. The mobile phone remains authorized in the sys tem.

De-authorizing a mobile phone Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Devices # Select the% symbol in the line of the

mobile phone. # Answer the confirmation prompt with Yes.

The mobile phone is de-authorized and deleted from the system.

Multimedia system 271

Information on Near Field Communication (NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. The following functions are available without having authorized a mobile phone: R Transferring a URL to be viewed in the multi

media system (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions). R Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via

the system settings (/ page 233).

Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Using a mobile phone with Near Field Com munication (NFC)

Requirements: R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see

the manufacturer's operating instructions) R The mobile phone's screen is switched on

and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions)

# To connect a mobile phone: open stowage compartment cover1.

# Place the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on logo2 on the inside of the cover. The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system.

# To change mobile phones: place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur er's operating instructions) on NFC logo2. If the mobile phone has already been author ized on the multimedia system, it is now con nected. If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul timedia system for the first time, it is connec ted after confirming the mobile phone instructions (see the manufacturer's operat ing instructions). Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Setting the reception and transmission vol ume

Requirements: R The mobile phone is authorized

(/ page 269).

Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5Z Options 5 Phone This function ensures optimal language quality.

272 Multimedia system

# Select Reception Volume or Transmission Volume.

# Set the volume.

Further information on the recommended recep tion and transmission volume: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Adjusting the call and ringtone volume Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Audio 5 Phone # Select Call Volume or Ringtone Volume. # Set the volume.

Starting or stopping mobile phone voice rec ognition

Requirements: R The mobile phone is connected to the multi

media system (/ page 269).

Starting mobile phone voice recognition # Press and hold the button on the multi

function steering wheel for more than one second. You can use mobile phone voice recognition.

Stopping mobile phone voice recognition # Press the8 or~ button on the multi

function steering wheel.

Calls

Using the telephone Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts

Making a call # Select Numerical Keypad. # Enter the number. # Selectw.

The call is made.

Accepting a call # Select Accept.

Rejecting a call # Select Reject.

Ending a call # Select=.

Activating functions during a call # To show all functions, navigate down. The following functions are available during a call: R End Call R Make Additional Call R Keyboard (show to send DTMF tones) R Switch Mute Mic on O or off . R Private Mode (an active call in hands-free

mode is transferred over to the telephone)

Conducting calls with several participants

Requirements: R There is an active call (/ page 273). R Another call is being made.

Switching between calls # Select call #.

The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

Activating or ending a call on hold # Select Continue Call or End Call.

Multimedia system 273

Conducting a conference call # Select Create Conference Call in the tele

phone menu. The new participant is included in the confer ence call.

Ending an active call # Select=. % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is

activated as soon as the active call is ended.

Accepting/rejecting a waiting call

Requirements: R There is an active call (/ page 273).

If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. An acoustic signal also sounds. # Select Accept.

The incoming call is active. If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold.

If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended.

# Select Reject. % This function and behavior depends on your

mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions).

Contacts

Information about the contacts menu The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or memory card. You can store up to 6,000 con tacts. Depending on the data source, you have the fol lowing number of contacts: R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:

3,000 entries

From the contacts menu, you can perform the following actions: R Using the telephone:

- Calling a contact (/ page 276) - Calling a new number (/ page 273) R Navigation (/ page 248) R Compose messages (/ page 277)

If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 269) and automatic calling up (/ page 274) is activated, the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book.

Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5Z Options 5 Contacts

Automatically # Switch Synchronize Contacts Automatically

on O.

Manually # Deactivate Synchronize Contacts Auto-

matically.

274 Multimedia system

# Select Synchronize Contacts.

Calling up contacts Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts Depending on the character set, the following options can be used to search for contacts: R searching by initials R searching by name R searching by phone number

# Enter characters into the search field. A selection of possible contacts appears. Entering more characters into the search field narrows down the number of possible selections.

# Select the contact. A contact can contain the following details: R phone numbers R navigation addresses R geo-coordinates R Internet address

Editing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5Z Options 5 Contacts 5 Name Format The following options are available: R Last Name, First Name R Last Name First Name R First Name Last Name # Select an option.

Overview of importing contacts

Contacts from various sources

Source Requirements

Memory card The SD memory card is inserted.

USB device The USB device is inserted in the USB port.

Source Requirements

Bluetooth con nection

Bluetooth is activa ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device (see the manufactur er's operating instruc tions).

Mobile phone The mobile phone is connected to the mul timedia system.

% If the sending of vCards via Bluetooth is supported, vCards can be received on mobile phones or netbooks, for example.

Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5Z Options 5 Contacts # Select Import. # Select an option.

Multimedia system 275

Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts # Select the mobile phone contact. # Selectp. # Select Save to Vehicle.

The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by thef symbol.

Calling a contact Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts # Enter characters into the search field. # Select the contact. # Select the telephone number.

The number is dialed.

Selecting further options in the contacts menu Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts # Select a contact. # Selectp.

Depending on the stored data, the following options are available: R Call R Send Text Message R Show Website (if an Internet address has

been stored) R Navigate (if an address has been stored) R Save My Favorite R Send DTMF Tones (for a number with DTMF

tones)

# Select an option.

Deleting a contact Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle. # Search for the contact. # Select the contact. # Selectp. # Select Delete Contact. # Select Yes.

Call list

Call list overview Depending on whether your mobile phone sup ports the PBAP Bluetooth profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list.

If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is supported, the effects are as follows: R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis

played in the multimedia system. R When connecting the mobile phone, you may

have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth profile.

If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is not supported, the effects are as follows: R The multimedia system generates its own call

lists. R The call list is not synchronized with the call

lists in the mobile phone.

276 Multimedia system

Making a call from the call list Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Recent Calls # Select a number.

The call is made.

Text messages

Overview of text message functions If the connected mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth profile, the text message func tions can be used on the multimedia system. You can obtain further information about set tings and supported functions of Bluetooth- capable mobile phones at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the multimedia system (see manufacturer's operating instructions). New messages are identified by thei sym bol in the media display and an audible signal.

Depending on the mobile phone, the multimedia system only displays new incoming text mes sages or the 100 newest text messages.

Configuring the text messages displayed Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5Z Options 5 Text Message 5 Message Display # Selectp.

A menu with the following options is shown: R All Messages R New and Unread Messages R New Messages R Off (The text messages are not displayed

automatically.) # Select an option. % The setting may not be active until the

mobile phone is reconnected.

Reading text messages Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5i Text Message

Reading a text message # Select a text message.

The message text is displayed.

Using the read-aloud function # Select a text message. # Select Read Aloud.

The text message is read aloud.

Composing and sending a text message Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5i Text Message # Select Write New Text Message.

Adding a recipient # Select Press to Add Recipient. # Select the contact.

Dictating text # Select Press to Dictate.

Multimedia system 277

# To start the dictation function: press on the central control element. The app for the dictation function is loaded. If there was no prior Internet connection, a connection is now established.

# Say the message. The dictation ends automatically after you have finished speaking. After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text.

# To replace a message: select Replace mes- sage. The text that has been dictated and shown on the display is reset and can be dictated again.

Editing text # Select the word. # To call up the correction menu: press on

the central control element. The following options are available: R Adjusting the capitalization of words (if

supported by the character set)

R Expanding the choice of words R Deleting the selection R Recording a new dictation

# To leave the menu: select Done.

Sending text messages # Select Send Text Message.

Replying to a text message Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5i Text Message # Open the text message. # Selectp. # Select Reply.

Calling a text message sender Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5i Text Message # Open the text message. # Selectp. # Select Call Sender.

Deleting text messages Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5i Text Message # Selectp. # To delete a text message: select Delete. # Outbox or # Select Drafts.

Mercedes-Benz link

Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits.

278 Multimedia system

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Using Mercedes-Benz Link, various functions and selected mobile phone apps can be transfer red to the media display. The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen tary equipment is required for this. You can obtain this at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter. % The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses

the Android operating system. % The service provider is responsible for these

apps and the services and content connec ted to it.

Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the multimedia system # Connect the Mercedes-Benz Link control box

with the USB port of the multimedia connection unit using a suitable connecting cable.

% A suitable connecting cable is available sep arately at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter.

Using Mercedes-Benz Link

Requirements: R The Mercedes-Benz Link control box is con

nected with the multimedia system using the USB port.

Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Mercedes-Benz Link # Select MB Link.

The mobile phone functions and apps are available and shown on the media display.

You can find more information in the Mercedes- Benz Link control box operating instructions.

Ending Mercedes-Benz Link Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Mercedes-Benz Link # Select Disconnect.

The connection is ended.

The mobile phone continues to be supplied with electricity.

or # Disconnect the connecting cable between

the Mercedes-Benz Link control box and the multimedia system.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Apple CarPlay

Overview of Apple CarPlay

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Multimedia system 279

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone functions can be used via the multime dia system using Apple CarPlay. They are oper ated using the central control element or the Siri voice control system. You can activate the voice control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

When using Apple CarPlay with voice control, the multimedia system can still be operated via the Voice Control System (/ page 206). Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Apple CarPlay to the multimedia sys tem.

The availability of Apple CarPlay may vary according to the country.

The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it.

Apple CarPlay is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Information on Apple CarPlay

While using Apple CarPlay various functions of the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the media sources Bluetooth audio and iPod, are unavailable. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone.

Connecting an iPhone via Apple CarPlay

Requirements: R Apple operating system version iOS 8.3 or

above is installed on the iPhone. R An Internet connection is required for the full

range of functions for Apple CarPlay.

R The iPhone is connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suita ble cable (/ page 297).

Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Apple CarPlay

Setting automatic or manual start A message appears when connected for the first time. # Automatic start: select Automatically.

Start Automatically is activated O.

Apple CarPlay will now start immediately after the iPhone is connected to the multi media system using a USB cable.

# Manual start: select Manually. # Select the iPhone in the device list.

Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg ulations A message with the data protection regulations appears. # Select Accept & Start. or

280 Multimedia system

# Select Decline & End.

Exiting Apple CarPlay

# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel, for example.

% If Apple CarPlay was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the appli cation starts in the background when recon nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay in the main menu.

Calling up Apple CarPlay sound settings Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Apple CarPlay 5 Sound # Select the sound menu (/ page 313).

Ending Apple CarPlay Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Apple CarPlay # Select Disconnect.

The connection is ended. The mobile phone continues to be supplied with electricity.

or

# Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Android Auto

Android Auto overview

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating sys tem on the multimedia system. It is operated using the central control element or voice con trol system. You can activate the voice control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Android Auto with voice control, the multimedia system can still be operated using the Voice Control System (/ page 206). Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Android Auto with the multimedia sys tem. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it.

Multimedia system 281

Information on Android Auto While using Android Auto, various functions of the multimedia system, for example the media source Bluetooth audio, are not available. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone.

Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto

Requirements: R The first activation of Android Auto on the

multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. R The mobile phone supports Android Auto

from Android 5.0. R The Android Auto app is installed on the

mobile phone. R In order to use the telephone functions, the

mobile phone must be connected to the mul timedia system via Bluetooth (/ page 269).

If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto. R The mobile phone is connected to the multi

media system via the USB port using a suitable cable (/ page 297). R An Internet connection is required for the full

range of functions for Android Auto.

Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Android Auto # Select the mobile phone from the device list.

Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg ulations A message with the data protection regulations appears. # Select Accept & Start. or # Select Decline & End.

Activating automatic start # Select Start Automatically O.

Starting manually # Select the mobile phone from the device list.

Exiting Android Auto # Press the button on the multifunction

steering wheel, for example. % If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore

ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu.

Calling up the Android Auto sound settings Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Android Auto 5 Sound # Select the tone menu (/ page 313).

Ending Android Auto Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Android Auto # Select Disconnect.

The connection is ended. The mobile phone continues to be supplied with electricity.

282 Multimedia system

or # Disconnect the connecting cable between

the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay

Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, cer tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to optimize com munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.

To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi media system is reset (/ page 240). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling

and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction

This data is only transferred while the navigation system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel).

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

Requirements: R You have access to a GSM network. R The contract partner's GSM network cover

age is available in the respective region. R The ignition is switched on so that vehicle

data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system 283

1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button

Making a Mercedes me call # Press button1.

Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button2, press it

briefly. # Press and hold SOS button3 for at least

one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system. Using the voice control system, you can select one of the following services: R Accident and breakdown management

(/ page 287) R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general

information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle

R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-

Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 286).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system

Requirements: R You have access to a GSM network. R The contract partner's GSM network cover

age is available in the respective region. R The ignition is switched on so that vehicle

data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Contacts # Call Mercedes me connect.

The call is made. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

284 Multimedia system

Then, you can select a service and be con nected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or

breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries. In limited situations the vehicle can detect acci dent or breakdown situations. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

# Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes

me connect service "Accident and Break down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 287). R A Mercedes-Benz Customer Center

employee takes your call and organizes the breakdown and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,

an automatic emergency call can be initi ated. This has priority over all other active calls.

% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with

Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select

Call. After your agreement the vehicle data is sent and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Center

Multimedia system 285

employee deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint ment and if necessary consult about the details.

% If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap pears at a later time.

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup

ported by the mobile phone network pro vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi

cient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission

technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv

ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys

tem.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication

platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.

286 Multimedia system

An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in

every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect provides the following services: R Accident and breakdown management (me

button) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto

matic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa ble for you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 283). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 284). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 288). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer

gency call system (/ page 288) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management. Forward ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on

location and/or the towing away of the vehi cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services.

Multimedia system 287

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me con nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con

trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services

Which data is transferred for the services can be taken from the currently valid terms of use. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall

in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is available for at least ten years starting from the manufacturing date. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net work coverage from the wireless service provid ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes- Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol lows (/ page 290). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con nect services. After the deactivation of

eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident.

288 Multimedia system

An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 289) or manually (/ page 289). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit uation.

Displays in the media display SOS READY: eCall available SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall is not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes- benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the emergency

call system (e.g. a malfunction with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears in the mul tifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Triggering an automatic emergency call

Requirements R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

If restraint systems such as airbags or Emer gency Tensioning Devices have been activated after an accident, the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system may automatically initiate an emergency call. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu

lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual emergency call # Press and hold the SOS button in the over

head control panel for at least one second.

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center.

Multimedia system 289

R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone.

Ending an unintentional emergency call # On the multifunction steering wheel:

select~. Depress the button for several seconds.

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hun

dred meters before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the

vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available

or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated

manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU

SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR- MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter

mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants

can be established

290 Multimedia system

Online and Internet functions Internet connection

Information on connecting to the Internet

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com

munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. The Internet functions can only be used to a limi ted degree whilst driving.

Function of the communication module On vehicles with a built-in communication mod ule, the Internet connection is established via an integrated SIM card. To use Internet access via the communication module the following conditions must be met: R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently

installed communication module. R Mercedes me connect is active and ready for

operation. R Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter

net access.

For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when purchasing the serv ices. Additional data volume is required to use some functions, e.g. Internet radio or Wi-Fi hotspot. If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited. The data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

Multimedia system 291

% Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether it is possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from a mobile phone network provider.

Connection status

Connection status overview

1 Display of the communication module recep tion field strength

2 Display of existing connection

Displaying the connection status Multimedia system: 4 System 5 Connectivity # Select Internet Status. % In the case of a connection via the communi

cation module the following status informa tion is shown: R Type of network R Status online/offline

Mercedes-Benz Apps

Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps

Requirements: R The registration for the use of Mercedes-

Benz Apps has been completed. R The general terms and conditions have been

confirmed.

Multimedia system: 4 Connect 5 Mercedes-Benz Apps # Select an app.

% The available features are country-depend ent. License fees may be applicable.

Using Mercedes-Benz Apps with voice con trol

Requirements: R The registration for the use of Mercedes-

Benz Apps has been completed. R The general terms and conditions have been

confirmed.

Theo symbol indicates that a Mercedes- Benz app can be used via voice control. # Select a Mercedes-Benz app.

The app menu is displayed. # To use voice control: selecto Lan-

guage. # Say the question or command. % Voice control is not available in all countries

and languages.

292 Multimedia system

TuneIn Radio

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements: R The Internet Radio service is activated. R The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis

sion free of interference. The services are country-dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source # Select TuneIn Radio.

The TuneIn Radio display appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Overview of TuneIn Radio

1 Internet Radio provider 2 Selected category 3 Display (if connected to private user

account) 4 Data transfer rate 5 Current station is stored as a favorite 6 Additional information on the current station

Selecting and connecting TuneIn Radio sta tions Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 TuneIn Radio 5 Search # Select a category. # Select a station.

The connection is established automatically. or # Select Enter Address or POI. # Enter a station name using the entry field. % A relatively large volume of data can be

transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.

Saving/deleting a TuneIn Radio station as a favorite Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 TuneIn Radio # Select a station.

Multimedia system 293

# Press and hold the central control element until an audible signal sounds. The symbol appears by the station name.

# Select Favorites . The list of saved favorite stations appears.

or # Create an account for the online provider

(TuneIn Radio) and then log in on the multi media system. Your favorites are imported to the multimedia system.

Deleting favorites # Select Favorites . # Select a station. # Press and hold the central control element

until an audible signal sounds. The symbol by the station name disap pears.

Setting the TuneIn Radio options Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 TuneIn Radio 5Z Options The following options are available: R Select Stream: select the stream quality R Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your

TuneIn user account R Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn

user account

# Select an option.

Media Audio mode

Information on the audio mode

& WARNING Risk of distraction when han dling data storage media

If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the

traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only handle a data storage medium

when the vehicle is stationary.

Permissible file systems: R FAT32 R exFAT R NTFS

Permissible data storage medium: R SD card R USB storage device R iPod/iPhone

R MTP devices R Bluetooth audio equipment

% Observe the following notes: R The multimedia system supports a total

of up to 50,000 files. R Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup

ported (32bit address space).

294 Multimedia system

Supported formats: R MP3 R WMA R AAC R WAV R FLAC R ALAC

% Observe the following notes: R Due to the large variety of available

music files regarding encoders, sampling rates and data rates, playback cannot always be guaranteed. R Due to the wide range of USB devices

available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. R Copy-protected music files or DRM

encrypted files cannot be played back. R MP3 players must support Media Trans

fer Protocol (MTP).

Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trade marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

Multimedia system 295

"Made for iPod", and "Made for iPhone," mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the devel oper to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and reg ulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

For the USA: iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun tries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

For Canada: iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Notes on copyright Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make

sure that you know about the applicable copy right regulations and that you comply with these.

Activating media mode Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources # Select a media source.

Playable music files are played back.

Inserting/removing an SD card

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal lowing SD cards

SD cards are small parts. They could be swallowed and lead to chok ing. # Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil

dren. # Seek medical attention immediately if

an SD card has been swallowed.

* NOTE Damage due to high temperatures

High temperatures may damage the SD card.

# Remove the SD card after use and take it out of the vehicle.

Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources 5 Mem. Card

Inserting The multimedia connection unit is located in the stowage compartment under the armrest. # Insert the SD memory card into the SD card

slot until it engages. The side with the con tacts must face downwards. Playable music files are played back.

Removing # Press the SD card. # Remove the SD card.

296 Multimedia system

Overview of the audio mode

1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Track, artist, album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the

track list 5 Search 6 Playback Control

7 Media Sources 8 Sound 9 Full Screen (for video playback) A Options

Connecting USB devices

* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera tures

High temperatures can damage USB devices. # Remove the USB device after use and

take it out of the vehicle.

Multimedia system 297

The multimedia connection unit is found in the storage compartment under the armrest and has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, addi tional USB ports can be found in the storage compartment of the center console and in the rear passenger compartment. # Connect the USB device to the USB port.

Playable music files are played back only if the corresponding media display is activated.

% Use the USB port identified by to use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto.

% Depending on the vehicle equipment there is an additional USB port in the rear passenger compartment. Ports that are labeled with a battery symbol can only be used to charge USB devices.

Selecting a track in the media playback Multimedia system: 4 Media

Selecting a track by skipping to a track # To skip backwards or forwards to a

track: navigate up or down.

Selecting a track using the current track list # Select. # Select Current Track List. # Select a track.

Selecting playback options Multimedia system: 4 Media 5Z Options

Playing back similar tracks # Select Play Similar Tracks.

A track list with similar tracks is created and played back.

Playback mode # Select Random Mode - Current Playlist.

The current track list is played in random order.

# Select Random Mode - Current Medium. All tracks on the active data storage medium are played in random order.

# Select Normal Track Sequence. The current track list is played in the order it appears on the data storage medium.

Controlling media playback Multimedia system: 4 Media 5Y Playback Control A bar with playback controls is shown. # To pause playback: select and confirm Y with the central control element. The symbol is displayed.

# To resume playback: select and confirm Y again with the central control element. The symbol is displayed.

To fast forward/rewind # Move on the timeline.

To hide the playback controls # Press the% button.

Video mode

Switching to video mode Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources # Select a data storage medium.

298 Multimedia system

# Search for and select video files or playlists with video files. Playable video files are played back.

The multimedia system supports the following formats: R MPEG R AVI, DivX, MKV R MP4, M4V R WMV

% If the vehicle is traveling faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) the video image is hidden from the driver. If available, the channel and program information is continuously displayed. Due to the large variety of available video files regarding encoders, sampling rates and data transfer rates, playback cannot be guar anteed. Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are sup ported. Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back.

Multimedia system 299

Overview of video mode

1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Track, artist, album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the

track list 5 Search 6 Playback Control

7 Media Sources 8 Sound 9 Full Screen (for video playback) A Options

Activating/deactivating full-screen mode Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources # Select a data storage medium.

Playable video files are played back. # To activate full-screen mode: select#

Full Screen.

300 Multimedia system

# To deactivate full-screen mode: press the touchpad.

Changing video settings Multimedia system: 4 Media 5Z Options 5 Picture Format The following picture formats are available: R Automatic R 16:9 R 4:3 R Zoom # Select a picture format.

Adjusting the brightness manually If the Automatic picture format is switched off, you can adjust the brightness yourself. # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.

Media search

Starting the media search Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Search Depending on the connected media sources and files, the following categories are listed: R Current Track List R Keyword Search R Playlists R Artists R Albums R Tracks R Folders R Music Genres R Year R Composers R Videos R Podcasts (Apple devices) R Audiobooks (Apple devices)

# Select a category.

% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analyzed.

Media Interface

Information about the Media Interface Media Interface is a universal interface for the connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul timedia system has two USB ports. The USB ports are located in the stowage compartment under the armrest.

Supported devices The Media Interface allows you to connect the following data storage media: R iPod

R iPhone

R MP3 player R USB devices

For details and a list of supported devices, visit our website at https://www.mercedes- benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section.

Multimedia system 301

Switching to Media Interface Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources # Connect a data storage medium to the USB

port (/ page 297). # Select a media device.

Playable music files are played back.

Overview of Media Interface

302 Multimedia system

1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Artist, track and album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the

track list 5 Search 6 Playback Control 7 Media Sources 8 Sound 9 Full Screen (video playback only) A Options

Bluetooth audio

Information about Bluetooth audio Before using your Bluetooth audio equipment with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to authorize it (/ page 304).

Multimedia system 303

Bluetooth audio overview

1 Active data storage medium 2 Album cover 3 Track, artist, album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the

track list 5 Search 6 Playback Control

7 Media Sources 8 Sound 9 Full Screen (video playback only) A Options

Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth audio device

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia

system and audio equipment (/ page 231). R The audio equipment supports the Blue

tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.

304 Multimedia system

R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.

Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources 5 Bluetooth Audio

Authorizing a new Bluetooth audio device # Select. # Select Add New Bluetooth Audio Device. # Select Start Search on System.

Detected audio equipment is displayed in the device list.

# Select a Bluetooth audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. The audio equipment is connected and play back starts.

Selecting previously authorized Bluetooth audio equipment # Select. # Select a Bluetooth audio device.

Establishing a connection from the Blue tooth audio equipment The Bluetooth device name of the multimedia system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX. # Select Search from Device. # Start the authorization on the audio equip

ment (see manufacturer's operating instruc tions). A code is displayed on the multimedia sys tem and on the audio device.

# Confirm on both devices if the codes are identical. The audio equipment is connected and play back starts.

With some audio equipment, playback must be initially started on the device itself so that the multimedia system can play the audio files.

% Device-specific information on authorizing and connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile phones can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Activating Bluetooth audio Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources # Select Bluetooth Audio.

The multimedia system activates the connec ted Bluetooth audio equipment.

Selecting the media player on the Bluetooth audio device Multimedia system: 4 Media 5

# Select the Bluetooth Audio Players category. If multiple media players are present on the Bluetooth audio equipment a list appears.

# Select a media player. Playback starts.

% The function is not supported by every mobile phone.

Multimedia system 305

Searching for a music track on the Blue tooth audio device Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Media Sources 5 Bluetooth Audio # Select. # Select a category.

A track list appears. # Select a track. % The function is only available when the

mobile phone and the media player selected on the mobile phone support this function.

Switching Bluetooth audio equipment via NFC

Requirements: R Observe the notes on using NFC

(/ page 272). R The Bluetooth audio overview is displayed

(/ page 304).

# Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone has already been author ized on the multimedia system as Bluetooth audio equipment, it is now connected. If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul timedia system as Bluetooth audio equip ment for the first time, it is connected after confirming the instructions on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Disconnecting Bluetooth audio equipment Multimedia system: 4 Phone 5 Media Sources # Select thei symbol in the line of the

mobile phone. The disconnection of the mobile phone takes place without a confirmation prompt. The mobile phone remains authorized in the sys tem.

Radio Switching on the radio

Multimedia system: 4 Radio # Alternatively: press the $ button.

The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected.

306 Multimedia system

Radio overview

1 Active frequency band 2 Station name or set frequency 3 Artist, title, album and radio text 4 Station list 5 Presets 6 Radio Source 7 Sound

8 Options

Multimedia system 307

Switching the HD Radio function on/off

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5Z Options 5 HD Radio

# Switch the function on O or off . % HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio and "Arc" logos are propri etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Setting the waveband

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source HD Radio FM HD Radio AM and SiriusXM Radio can be selected. # Select a frequency band.

Selecting a radio station

Multimedia system: 4 Radio # Navigate up or down.

Calling up the radio station list

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5

# Select a station.

Searching for radio stations using station names or direct frequency entry

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5

# Enter a station name or frequency. # Selecta.

The search results are displayed. # Select a station.

Storing radio stations

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Presets # Select Store Current Station in the Presets.

Managing radio station presets

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Presets

Moving stations: # Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the

left.

308 Multimedia system

# Select Move Highlighted Station. # Select a memory preset.

Deleting stations: # Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the

left. # Select Delete Highlighted Station. # Select Yes.

Activating/deactivating radio text

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5Z Options 5 Display Radio Text Information # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Satellite radio

Information on the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to

broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail able for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Cen ter and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

Satellite radio restrictions Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail able or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These include environmental or topographical conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations may not be possible.

Registering satellite radio

Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment R Registration with a satellite radio provider

R If registration is not included when purchas ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5Z Options # Select Service Information.

The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub scription status.

# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions.

The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

% You can also have the satellite service acti vated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

Switching on satellite radio Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source # Select SiriusXM Radio.

Multimedia system 309

Overview of the satellite radio

1 Active frequency band 2 Logo or cover picture for the song (if availa

ble) 3 Category 4 Channel name 5 Artist, track and album 6 SiriusXM Radio Channels

7 Presets 8 Radio Source 9 Sound A Playback Control B Options

Selecting a satellite radio category Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5 SiriusXM Radio Channels 5 Category # Select a category.

310 Multimedia system

Selecting a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio # Navigate up or down.

Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5 Presets # Select Store Current Station in the Presets.

Moving a channel # Select Options. # Select Move Highlighted Station. # Select a memory preset.

Deleting a channel # Select Options. # Select Delete Highlighted Station. # Select a memory preset.

Displaying EPG information for the current channel Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5Z Options # Select EPG Information about Current Chan-

nel.

Setting parental control for radio Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5Z Options 5 Parental Control # Activate the function O. # Determine a four-digit character sequence

and select. All channels with adult content are locked.

Unlocking a channel # Enter the four-digit character sequence and

select. All channels with adult content are unlocked.

Music and sport alerts function This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. If a match is found with a stored alert, you will be informed.

Setting music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5Z Options 5 Alert for Artist, Song & Sporting Event

Setting a music alert # Select Add New Alert. or # Select Manage Artist & Song Alerts. # Select Options.

The following options are available: R Mark This Entry R Unmark This Entry

Multimedia system 311

R Mark All Entries R Unmark All Entries R Delete This Entry R Delete All Entries

# Select an option. # Activate Artist & Song Alerts O.

The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.

Setting a sport alert # Select Add New Alert. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Select New Alerts. or # Select Edit Alerts. # Select a team from a league. # Activate Sports Alerts O.

Information on Smart Favorites and Tune Start Stations in the station presets can be added as Smart Favorites. Smart Favorites stations are automatically saved to temporary storage in the background. If you change to a Smart Favorites station, you can replay, pause or actively skip forward or back to broadcasts which you have missed. If Tune Start is activated and you change to another Smart Favorites station, the music track currently playing on the station is automat ically restarted from the beginning of the track.

Adding a channel to Smart Favorites Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio # Select the active frequency band. # Highlight an entry. # Select. # Select Add Highlighted Channel to Smart

Favorites.

Activating/deactivating TuneStart Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5Z Options 5 TuneStart # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Controlling playback Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5Y Playback Control You can pause the playback of the current sta tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline. This leaves live mode to access the internal tem porary storage. # To fast forward/rewind: turn the controller

counter-clockwise or clockwise/swipe left or right on the touchpad.

# To jump to the previous/next song: press the controller left or right/swipe left or right on the touchpad.

# To pause playback: select. # To return to live mode: navigate to the end

of the timeline.

312 Multimedia system

Displaying satellite radio service information Multimedia system: 4 Radio 5 Radio Source 5 SiriusXM Radio 5Z Options # Select Service Information.

Sound Tone settings

Information about the sound system The sound system has a total output of 100 W and is equipped with five speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. % The call can also be made from other audio

sources. Replace Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.

Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader

R Automatic Volume Adjustment R Other Sound Settings # Select a sound menu.

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set tings Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Equalizer # Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass. # Change the settings.

Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Automatic Volume Adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Adjusting the balance/fader Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Balance and Fader # Adjust the balance and fader. # To exit the menu: press the% button.

Burmester surround sound system

Information about the Burmester surround sound system The Burmester surround sound system has a total output of 590 W and is equipped with 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. % The call can also be made from other audio

sources. Replace Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.

Multimedia system 313

Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader R Automatic Volume Adjustment R Surround Sound R Sound Focus R Other Sound Settings # Select a function.

Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Equalizer # Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass. # Set the desired values.

Activating or deactivating volume adjust ment in the Burmester surround sound sys tem Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Automatic Volume Adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Balance and Fader # Adjust the balance and fader. # To exit the menu: press the% button.

Switching surround sound on or off in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Surround Sound # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Sound Focus # Adjust the sound focus.

Advanced sound system

Information about the Advanced sound sys tem The Advanced sound system has a total output of 225 W and is equipped with nine speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.

314 Multimedia system

Calling up the sound menu in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader R Automatic Volume Adjustment # Select a function.

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set tings in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Equalizer # Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass. # Set the desired values.

Switching volume adjustment in the Advanced sound system on/off Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Automatic Volume Adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources. # Activate O or deactivate the function.

Setting the balance/fader in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system: 4 Media 5 Sound 5 Balance and Fader # Adjust the balance and fader.

Multimedia system 315

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long

periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button

on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer

(/ page 202).

Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Adhere to the prescribed service inter vals.

# Always have the prescribed mainte nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi

ate stops R mainly short-distance driving

316 Maintenance and care

R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long

periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions

and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on

the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 316).

Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood

is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood

The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there

is a person in the hood's range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot

gases. R You could come into contact with other

hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off.

Maintenance and care 317

Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never reach into the danger zone sur

rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition

system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open

When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and ignition before opening the engine hood.

Opening the hood

# To release the hood, pull on handle1.

318 Maintenance and care

# Push handle1 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood until it opens automatically.

Closing the hood # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in

(20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.

# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the oil dipstick

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

Requirements: R The engine has an oil dipstick. If not, the

engine oil level can be checked only with the on-board computer (/ page 320) .

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in different locations. The waiting time before checking the oil level when the engine is at normal operating tempera ture is five minutes.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Pull oil dipstick1 out and wipe off.

Maintenance and care 319

# Slowly slide oil dipstick1 into the guide tube to the stop, and pull it out again after about three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between2

and3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at3 or

below. R Oil level too high: oil level is above2.

# If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt (1 liter) of engine oil.

# If the oil level is too high, drain off excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the engine oil level using the on- board computer

Requirements: R The engine has an oil level sensor. If not, the

engine oil level can be checked only with the oil dipstick (/ page 319). R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed.

R The hood is closed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level One of the following messages will appear on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement

of the oil level is not yet possible.

# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for

indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.

R Engine Oil Level Add 1.0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunc tion display is orange and is below "min":

# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.

R Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunc tion display is orange and is above "max":

# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil

level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil

level sensor is malfunctioning or not connec ted.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood.

320 Maintenance and care

Refilling engine oil

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled

next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor

oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.

# Do not use additives.

* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

% Depending on driving style, the vehicle con sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption

may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

# Turn cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

# Add engine oil. # Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise until it

engages.

Maintenance and care 321

# Check the oil level again (/ page 319).

Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening

the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective

gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres

sure.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the

instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot tom quarter of the temperature display.

# Slowly turn cap1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure.

# Continue turning cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to

marker bar2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to

0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar2.

# If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

% Further information on coolant (/ page 393)

Refilling the windshield washer system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

322 Maintenance and care

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

# Remove cap1 by the tab. # Refill washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield

washer fluid (/ page 394)

Keeping the air-water duct free

# Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.

Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle

The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,

brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.

Maintenance and care 323

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash

* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R To avoid possible water ingress in the vehi

cle, it is preferable to use car washes which allow the high-pressure pre-cleaning to be deactivated (specification for the convertible program). R Avoid any hot-wax treatment. R Make sure that the wind deflector on the

windshield has been retracted. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The surround view camera or the rear view

camera is switched off.

R The side windows and soft top are closed completely. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is

switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position

g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R For car washes with a conveyor system:

- Neutrali is engaged. - If you would like to leave the vehicle while

it is being washed, make sure the Smart Key is located in the vehicle. The park positionj is otherwise automatically engaged.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

324 Maintenance and care

Notes on using a power washer

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-

spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts

replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in

(30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.

Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140F (60C). R Observe the information on the correct dis

tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper ating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer

directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, soft top, wind deflector net, gaps, electrical compo nents, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand

* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress

# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using

a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.

% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 329).

Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care

Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork.

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off

afterwards.

Maintenance and care 325

R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp

cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate

rials. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matte finish R Only use care products approved for

Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the

latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final

hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish

ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint work care" (/ page 325). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild

cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora

tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off

afterwards.

R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils

are impaired by: - Sunlight - Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.

Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative

foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

326 Maintenance and care

You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car

ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on cleaning and care of the soft top

Observe the following notes in order to prevent damage to the soft top.

Light dirt R Clean the soft top when dry. R Rinse with clean water.

Normal to heavy dirt R Clean the soft top with a brush and clean

water. R Clean stains and other heavy dirt with a

brush and soft-top cleaning agents recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

R Brush from front to back in the direction of the fabric.

Avoiding soft-top damage R Never use gasoline, thinners, tar or stain

remover or other organic solvents. R Remove bird droppings immediately, as they

are corrosive and can therefore cause the soft-top fabric to leak. R Never use a power washer. R Do not use sharp-edged equipment to

remove ice and snow.

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's resist ance to dirt. To restore the effect, clean the soft top with the soft-top cleaning agents recommen ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging, can cause the soft-top seams to leak. If this hap pens, have the soft-top seams sealed at a quali fied specialist workshop, e.g. at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % Place a suitable cover over the soft top if you

plan to leave the vehicle outside for a long period of time.

Cleaning AIRCAP

Cleaning the wind deflector

* NOTE Damage to the net due to using a power washer

# Never use a power washer to clean the net of the wind deflector.

Requirements: R The soft top is closed. R The electric parking brake has been applied. R The ignition is switched on.

Maintenance and care 327

# Pull button1. The wind deflector between the windshield and the soft top will extend.

# Light dirt: clean wind deflector net1 with a soft brush or a damp cloth.

# Heavier dirt: clean net1 with care prod ucts and cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

# Rinse or spray the net with clean water.

Cleaning the wind screen

Requirements: R The soft top is open. R The electric parking brake has been applied. R The ignition is switched on.

# Pull button1. The AIRCAP wind screen moves upwards.

328 Maintenance and care

# Clean wind screen net1 with a damp cloth in conjunction with the care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the folding wind screen

* NOTE Damage to the net due to using a power washer

# Never use a power washer to clean the net of the wind deflector.

Requirements: R Make sure that the notes on the correct

installation and stowing location of the fold ing wind screen are observed (/ page 76).

# Clean folding wind screen net with a damp cloth in conjunction with the care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Notes on care of vehicle parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned

If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around

the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi cle parts:

Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to

remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and

brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few

Maintenance and care 329

minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a

damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-

based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.

Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement

position (/ page 114). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the

wiper blades with a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.

Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild

cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear

bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 150). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini

mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).

Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia

system (/ page 189). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the

camera lens. R Do not use a power washer.

Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended

for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod

ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol lowing notes on cleaning and care:

330 Maintenance and care

Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176F

(80C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber

cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents.

Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate

rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sun cream to come in contact with the plas tic trim.

Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth.

R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,

polishes or waxes.

Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec

ommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA

* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.

R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too

damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences.

Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a

dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too

damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Maintenance and care 331

Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1%

soapy water and allow to dry.

332 Maintenance and care

Emergency Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the stowage com partments in the driver and front passenger door. # To remove: pull out safety vest bag by loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the

safety vest.

1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron

5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. The safety vest must be replaced in the following situations: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty R The maximum permissible number of washes

is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.

# Remove warning triangle2.

Breakdown assistance 333

Setting up the warning triangle

# Fold side reflectors1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud2.

# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview

First-aid kit (soft sided)1 is in the trunk in the left-hand or right-hand storage net, depending on the model.

Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire

A flat tire severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe cialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning

notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire).

334 Breakdown assistance

In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos

sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 335). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair

the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 336). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you

can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 283). R All vehicles: change the wheel

(/ page 378).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.

Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum

speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving

maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls

# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special

ist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure monitor ing system.

Breakdown assistance 335

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tires for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance pos sible in emergency

mode

Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand ard tire as a temporary measure.

TIREFIT kit storage location

The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk floor.

1 Tire inflation compressor 2 Tire sealant bottle

1 Bag

Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the cargo compartment floor or in bag1 in the trunk.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker R Tire inflation compressor R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)

336 Breakdown assistance

TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 336) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 F (-20 C).

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant

The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are cuts or punctures in the tire

larger than damage previously men tioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at very low tire pressure

or on a flat tire.

# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor

oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.

# If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of any clothes contamina ted with tire sealant immediately.

# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which

have entered the tire.

Breakdown assistance 337

# Affix part1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Affix part2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.

# Pull plug4 with the cable and hose5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

# Push the plug of hose5 into flange6 of tire sealant bottle1 until the plug engages.

# Place tire sealant bottle1 head downwards into recess2 of the tire inflation compres sor.

# Remove the cap from valve7 on the faulty tire.

# Screw filling hose8 onto valve7. # Insert plug4 into a 12 V socket in your

vehicle. # Switch on the ignition.

# Press on and off switch3 on the tire infla tion compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compres sor during this phase! # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a

maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene.

338 Breakdown assistance

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx

imately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed

limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).

# Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster in a location where it will be easily seen by the driver.

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant

After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the

plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire. # Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla

tion compressor. # Pull away immediately.

Breakdown assistance 339

# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar

on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

# To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button1 next to manometer2.

# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.

# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. Press the locking tabs on the yellow cap together to do this. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot tle.

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

340 Breakdown assistance

Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.

# Do not drive on.

# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

R Further information on ABS (/ page 152) R Further information on ESP (/ page 152)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- ion battery

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge

that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor

oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

Breakdown assistance 341

All vehicles

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat

tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

342 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage

When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage

When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting

There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of

the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con necting and disconnecting the battery.

# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jumper cable.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance

During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks

and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila

tion. # Do not lean over a battery.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before

charging it or performing starting assis tance.

Breakdown assistance 343

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts

to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg

ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps

must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not

come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the

battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc

tions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided

using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jump

start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Preparing starting assistance/charging # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric

parking brake. # Automatic transmission: Shift the trans

mission to positionj. # Manual transmission: Shift the transmis

sion to neutral. # Switch off the ignition and all electrical con

sumers. # Open the hood.

344 Breakdown assistance

# Fold cover1 up in the direction of the arrow.

# Slide cover2 of positive clamp3 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc tion of the arrow.

Starting assistance # Connect positive contact3 on your vehicle

to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive clamp3 on your own vehicle first.

# Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

# Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery to ground point4 of your vehicle using the jumper cable. Begin with the donor battery first.

# Start the engine of your own vehicle. # Let the engines run for several minutes. # Before disconnecting the jumper cables,

switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or the lighting.

When the starting assistance procedure is com plete: # First, remove the jumper cables from ground

point4 and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then from positive contact3 and the positive terminal of the donor bat tery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.

# After removing the jumper cables, close cover2 of positive contact3.

# Close cover1.

Breakdown assistance 345

Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.

Charging # Connect positive contact3 of the vehicle to

the positive terminal of the charger using the charging cable. Always begin with positive contact3 of the vehicle.

# Connect the negative terminal of the charger and ground point4 on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger.

# Start the charging process.

When the charging process is complete: # First, remove the charging cable from ground

point4 and the negative terminal of the charger, then from positive contact3 and the positive terminal of the charger. Begin each time with the contacts of the vehicle.

# After removing the charging cable, close cover2 of positive contact3.

# Close cover1.

Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 341).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery

which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent

hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.

R Make sure that the vent hose is always con nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon

nected in the same way.

Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

346 Breakdown assistance

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys tems.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock

4MATIC vehicles

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

No

To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 346).

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be

released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni orj

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni, or the multifunction dis play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 349). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.

Breakdown assistance 347

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances

The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)

must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)

must not be exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permis sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other wise the following could occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may

swerve or even rollover.

# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed

the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of

the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 387).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionj.

# Install the towing eye (/ page 350). # Fasten the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 68).

# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 174). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

# Release the electric parking brake.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys

tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri

cal system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar.

348 Breakdown assistance

# Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 347).

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in

positionj in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift toi, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 344).

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)

& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS

When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # When transporting, ensure that:

R The vehicle has been loaded onto the transporter correctly R The vehicle is secured at all four

wheels with suitable tensioning straps R The maximum permissible speed of

35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded when transporting

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur ing it incorrectly

# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

Breakdown assistance 349

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle.

Towing eye storage location

The towing eye is located in the storage space under the trunk floor.

Installing the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

# Make sure that cover1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye

When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or

tow start the vehicle.

Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

350 Breakdown assistance

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci

fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the labeling. The fuse ratings and fur ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the trunk (/ page 353).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the

driver's side (/ page 352) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit

(/ page 353) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell

(/ page 353)

Breakdown assistance 351

R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 353)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 351).

Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open

When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and ignition before opening the engine hood.

# Turn retaining clip2 on cover1 a quarter- turn counter-clockwise.

# Fold cover1 up in the direction of the arrow.

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

# Loosen screws3 and remove fuse box lid 4 upwards.

Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor

rectly in lid4.

352 Breakdown assistance

# Insert lid4 into the bracket at the back of the fuse box.

# Fold down lid4 of the fuse box and tighten screws3.

# Fold down cover1. # Turn retaining clip2 on cover1 a quarter-

turn clockwise. # Close the hood.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 351).

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen

ter for further information.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 351).

# Open cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 351). # Open the trunk floor .

# Fold cover1 up in the direction of the arrow.

The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.

Breakdown assistance 353

Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

& WARNING Risk of injury through dam aged tires

Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of

damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread

Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the

tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires:in (4 mm)

# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off- road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 355).

R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the

tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).

Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx imately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

354 Wheels and tires

Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect mounting of snow chains

If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front

wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear

wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains

If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear

wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain

wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that

have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum

permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do

not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains

are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 183).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 154). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tire pressure

Tires with either too low or too high a pres sure present the following hazards: R the tires could burst R the tires could wear excessively and/or

unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as

steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired

# Observe the recommended tire pres sures and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel: R monthly R if altering the load on the vehicle R prior to long journeys R if the operating conditions change, for

example when driving off-road

Wheels and tires 355

# Adjust the tire pressure where neces sary.

Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and

thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure

Tires with pressure that is too low can over heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire faults as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear

R Increased fuel consumption

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.

Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea ted pressure drop in the tires

The wheels, valves or tires could be dam aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture

or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the

Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 362). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel

filler flap (/ page 357).

Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 368).

356 Wheels and tires

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys tem: You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve

caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example

data.

If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

Wheels and tires 357

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 369). R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 362) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 368)

Checking the tire pressure manually

# Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.

# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.

# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom

mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355)

R Tire pressure table (/ page 357) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 362)

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem

& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor rect tire pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and then inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for these tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

358 Wheels and tires

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately a minute

and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea sons, including the installation of incompati ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed to the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 360).

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R Via display messages (/ page 439). R Via theh warning lamp in the instrument

cluster (/ page 460)

The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 360).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign

object penetrating the tire, for example

Wheels and tires 359

R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres sure monitoring system

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of

the individual wheels:

R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in

process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni tored.

# Compare the tire pressure with the recom mended tire pressure for the current operat ing condition (/ page 357). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 355).

% The values displayed in the on-board com puter may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indi cated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.

Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys tem

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 355).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Refer- ence Values? message is shown in the multi function display.

# To restart, press Touch Control on the left- hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellowh warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

360 Wheels and tires

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355)

Tire pressure loss warning system

Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrectly set tire pressure R Sudden pressure loss caused, for example,

by a foreign object penetrating the tire R Steady pressure loss in several tires

The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains

R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel eration R Driving with a high load

The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355) R Display messages about the tires

(/ page 439)

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all wheels.

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System Active Restart: Press Touch Control message is shown in the multifunction display.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display.

# Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press Touch Control on

the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display.

Wheels and tires 361

After you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure of all the tires.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355)

Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac ard

& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa ded tires

Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the

permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding

the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

1 Tire and Loading Information placard

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats2 according to

the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.

362 Wheels and tires

R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. R Recommended tire pressure1 for cold

tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads

on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 387). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres

sure table (/ page 357).

Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load

(/ page 363) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.

# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

# (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five occupants 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa

ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula ted in step 4.

# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load care fully, you should still make sure that the maxi mum permissible gross weight and the maxi mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi cle identification plate.

Wheels and tires 363

# Have your loaded vehicle including driver, occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.

Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max

imum load (/ page 364)

R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 362) R Tire pressure table (/ page 357) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 387)

Calculation example for determining the maximum load

The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying

seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 362). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

364 Wheels and tires

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 1

Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3

Front: 1

Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

Wheels and tires 365

Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling

1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (/ page 366)

2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number (/ page 367)

3 Maximum tire load (/ page 368) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 368)

5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 369) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 369) 8 Tire name

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Tire Quality Grading

In accordance with the US Department of Trans portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per formance factors:

1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.

Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times

366 Wheels and tires

as well on the government course as a tire gra ded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction grade

& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade quate traction

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and

drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin

# Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance.

Temperature grade

& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres

sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the

tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.

Wheels and tires 367

% The data shown in the image is example data.

The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

symbol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu

facturer identification code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 374).

R Tire size: identifier3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be

used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).

Information on the maximum tire load

% The data shown in the image is example data.

Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv er's side (/ page 362).

Specifications for maximum tire pressure

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

368 Wheels and tires

Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 357).

Information on tire characteristics

% The data shown in the image is example data.

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires 369

First letter(s)1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US

manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu

facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with

high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per cent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above

149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and

Loading Information placard (/ page 362) R Maximum tire load (/ page 368) R Load index

Speed rating7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

370 Wheels and tires

Index Speed rating

ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes "ZR" and there

is no speed rating7, find out what the max imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7

are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear thei snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.

Load index8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)

tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein

forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire

R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber- coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT- marked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.

Wheels and tires 371

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac tory. The tire and information table contains the rec ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max imum permissible load and the maximum per missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,

regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight

of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load- bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if

372 Wheels and tires

these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours

without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur

er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 373

Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tires

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with

those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model

When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved

For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con trol systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer

tain AMG tires)

Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle.

374 Wheels and tires

Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tires

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no

information about their previous usage.

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles.

# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes

Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified

specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus ing permanent damage to the tire. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use

i M+S- tires.

Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires

The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk

Wheels and tires 375

of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP and adapt your

driving style accordingly. # Usei M+S tires at outside temper

atures of less than 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur

pose.

Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in

certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one

axle (left and right).

It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring

system: All installed wheels must be equip ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45F (7C) use win

ter tires or all-season tires markedi M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same

tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for

the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for

the first 60 miles (100 km).

R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not fea

ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 362) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 369) R Tire pressure table (/ page 357) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 383)

376 Wheels and tires

Notes on rotating wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes

Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tires are of the same dimen sions.

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the

tire

Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty

book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 378).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease

or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt

The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag1 in the trunk.

Wheels and tires 377

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located at other positions in the trunk.

The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements: R The required tire-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

ground.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift into positionj. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the

normal vehicle level (/ page 183). # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under

the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 378).

# Raise the vehicle (/ page 379).

Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

(/ page 378).

Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub

cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.

# Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

378 Wheels and tires

Aluminum hub cap

# To remove: position socket2 from the tire- change tool kit on hub cap1.

# Position wheel wrench3 on socket2. # Using wheel wrench3, turn hub cap1

counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in

reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft

(25 Nm).

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel

change (/ page 378). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been

removed (/ page 378).

Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has

been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and

holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti

cally under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the

vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release

the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk

lid.

Wheels and tires 379

# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com pletely.

Position of jack support points

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

# Only position the jack at the appropri ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for

jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.

380 Wheels and tires

# Position support2 of jack4 on jack sup port point1.

# Turn crank3 clockwise until support2 sits completely on jack support point1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Turn crank3 until the tire is raised a maxi mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 381).

Removing a wheel

Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 379).

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.

# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com pletely.

# Remove the wheel. # Install the new wheel (/ page 381).

Installing a new wheel

Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 381).

Wheels and tires 381

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv ing. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 374).

For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the

alignment bolt and push it on.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 374).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes- Benz and for the wheel in question.

* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt

If the wheel has too much play when screw ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the

wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 382).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed

(/ page 381).

382 Wheels and tires

# To lower the vehicle: turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 to the specified tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel

nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor que checked immediately.

# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

# Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn ing system (/ page 361). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 360). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.

Wheels and tires 383

# Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.

# Do not switch off ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.

Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency

spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an

emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h).

R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six

years at the latest, regardless of wear.

% Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure loss warning sys tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 355) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 362)

R Tire pressure table (/ page 357) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 374)

384 Wheels and tires

Notes on technical data

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle electronics Two-way radios

Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an

exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor

rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna.

This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior

antenna installed at a qualified special ist workshop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out

put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.

Technical data 385

1 Rear fenders

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna

connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.

Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

(30 W)

4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz

(15 W)

2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz

(25 W)

trunked radio sys tem/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz

(10 W)

Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output

70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz

(15 W)

Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)

(10 W)

The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis

sion output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies

in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol lowing frequency bands: R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm frequency band

386 Technical data

R 2G/3G/4G

Radio operating permits for vehicle compo nents Manufacturer information about wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Radio operating permits" in the Digital Opera tor's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

Technical data 387

Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).

Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

VIN below right-hand front seat

1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering

Additional plates

1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 Plate with information about emissions test

ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California

3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label at the lower edge of the windshield

388 Technical data

Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health

Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con

tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.

# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution due to disposing of operating fluids in a non-environmentally responsi ble manner

Operating fluids include the following: R fuels R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.

DEF R lubricants

Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environ ment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi

ronmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid

R Climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating flu ids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids by entering the designation - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R at a qualified specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

Technical data 389

# Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor

oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: R Unleaded premium grade gasoline R E85 fuel R A mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded premium

grade gasoline

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel

Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas oline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

390 Technical data

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 141). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON.

* NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline

Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with

unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre mium grade gasoline.

# Do not drive at the maximum design speed.

# Avoid sudden acceleration engine speeds over 3000 rpm.

Further information on fuel is available at the fol lowing locations: R at a gas station R at a qualified specialist workshop R on the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen

ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes- Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi cated on the tank.

Technical data 391

Tank content and reserve fuel

Capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 17.4 gal (66.0 liters)

Model of which reserve fuel

All models 1.8 gal (7.0 liters)

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the

prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

Gasoline engines Engine oil specifica tions

All models 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71*

* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

392 Technical data

Replacement amount

Model Replacement amount

C 300 7.0 US qt (6.6 liters)

C 300 4MATIC 6.3 US qt (6.0 liters)

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys tem

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired.

# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before

adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the filler opening.

# Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant

# Only use coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection.

Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids 310.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro

Technical data 393

tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by

Mercedes-Benz. # Observe the instructions in the

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection

down to approximately -35F (-37C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49F (-45C))

Coolant capacity

Model Capacity

All models 9.5 US qt (9.0 liters)

Notes on windshield washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid

Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam age the plastic surface of the exterior light ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which

is also suitable for use on plastic surfa ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter Fit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windshield washer flu ids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round.

Refrigerant

Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 389).

394 Technical data

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger ant

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R1234yf refrigerant.

* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com pressor oil

# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger ant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may be car ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig

erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.

Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig

erant used 6 Refrigerant type

Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig

erant used 6 Refrigerant type

Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop only

Technical data 395

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil

Model Refrigerant

All models 22.2 0.4 oz (630 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 2.8 0.4 oz (80 10 g)

Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment

Height when opened

Model 1 Height when opened

C 300 58.5 in (1486 mm)

C 300 4MATIC 58.9 in (1495 mm)

Vehicle dimensions

C 300

Vehicle length 184.5 in (4686 mm)

Vehicle width including out side mirrors

79.3 in (2016 mm)

Vehicle width without outside mirrors

71.3 in (1810 mm)

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)

396 Technical data

C 300

Vehicle height 55.5 in (1409 mm)

Vehicle height when opening/ closing the roof

78.0 in (1982 mm)

Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m)

Vehicle dimensions

C 300 4MATIC

Vehicle length 184.5 in (4686 mm)

Vehicle width including out side mirrors

79.3 in (2016 mm)

Vehicle width without outside mirrors

71.3 in (1810 mm)

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)

C 300 4MATIC

Vehicle height 55.7 in (1416 mm)

Vehicle height when opening/ closing the roof

78.2 in (1987 mm)

Turning radius 37.6 ft (11.45 m)

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the speci fied vehicle data: R items of optional equipment increase the

curb weight and reduce the payload.

Technical data 397

Display messages Introduction

Information about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may dif fer from the symbols on the multifunction dis play. The multifunction display shows high-prior ity display messages in red. Certain display mes sages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the symbol to show further infor

mation on the media display. Press the symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing theP back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The multifunction display shows these dis play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip

ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press the back buttonP.

398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (Example)

* The corresponding head airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the head airbag malfunctioning

If the head airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not deploy at all in the event of an accident. # Have the head airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator's Man- ual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a per son of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the sys tem detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag

If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a person of smaller stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is

located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Obtain a New Key

* Have SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 65).

Key Not Detected (white display message)

* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey

(/ page 126).

402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Not Detected (red dis play message)

* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 126).

Don't Forget Your Key

* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor's Manual

* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 126).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403

Soft top

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

K While stationary, apply the brakes before operating the soft top.

* The vehicle is stationary and you are trying to open or close the soft top. # Depress the brake pedal. # Push or pull the soft top switch again until the soft top is fully open or closed.

K Convertible Top Operation Possible to 37 mph

* If you drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h), you cannot open or close the soft top. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). # Fully open or close the soft top.

K Convertible Top Lowering

* The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressurized. # Fully open or close the soft top.

404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

K Open/Close Convertible Top Completely

* The soft top is not locked. If you drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h), you cannot open or close the soft top. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). # Fully open or close the soft top.

K 12 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. # Start the engine.

J Trunk Partition Open

* The trunk partition is open. # Close the trunk partition.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: Check Left Low Beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting

diodes in the light are faulty.

: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative

* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: Switch On Headlamps

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.

: Switch Off Lights

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.

: Intell. Light System Inoper- ative

* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 111). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart

Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V

battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).

Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.

M * The hood is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Close the hood.

410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N * The trunk lid is open.

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

# Close the trunk lid.

_ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example)

* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

_ Front Left Seat Backrest Not Locked (example)

* The seat backrest of the corresponding front seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Washer Fluid

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 322).

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 secs. or press 3 times.

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 125).

+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant (/ page 322). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off

* The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

* The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

8 Fuel Level Low

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

8 Gas Cap Loose

* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi- cle is Stationary

* It is possible to select the park positionj only if the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj when the vehicle is stationary.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh,k or neutrali.

414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj or neutrali and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. # Change the transmission position.

Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission positionk. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionk.

Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission positionh,k or neutrali is selected. # Select park positionj when switching off the vehicle.

N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away

* Neutrali has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission positionh ork.

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # When transmission positionh is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans

mission position.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission positionk cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutrali automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park positionj. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling

* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir

cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion

* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor's Manual

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 148).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 148). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 148). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 148).

To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Can ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.

418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To apply: # Switch the ignition off.

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 148).

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,

release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 148).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

* The redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 148). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 149).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.

420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake

* The redF (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Off

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 154).

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 156). # If necessary, take a break.

- - - mph

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 158).

Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 157).

- - - mph

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 162).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Suspended

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 159).

Off

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 162).

Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 159). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.

Active Distance Assist Inop- erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist Now Available

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 162).

424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 166). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. # If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision. # Check the tire pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist Inop- erative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 168). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 166). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle safely and clean the windshield.

Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive

* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Camera View Restricted See Opera- tor's Manual

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Clean the windshield.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 177). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine. # If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is especially dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal

functioning.

Blind Spot Assist Inopera- tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 177). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 179). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: The camera view may be limited by the windshield. # Drive on.

Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision

428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

R Heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph

* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and

set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and

set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 183). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.

Lowering

* The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons: R You have selected a different drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.

430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Vehicle Rising

* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle Rising Please Wait

* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Drive More Slowly

* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).

Active Parking Assist Maneuvering Assistance Restricted See Operator's Manual

* The Parking Assist maneuvering assistance is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 329). # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h).

432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care fully.

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care

fully.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 329). # Restart the engine.

436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Mercedes me connect

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Mercedes me connect Services Limited See Oper- ator's Manual

* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 26). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# 12 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

* If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# See Operator's Manual

* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.

# Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running

* The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir

cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # If the display goes out: you can drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on.

Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive

* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors

* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing

* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

h Check Tires

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 355) and the tires.

h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure

* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 360).

h Warning Tire Malfunction

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire

R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi

ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.

Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 334).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires.

Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tire pressure loss warning system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Tire Pressure Soon * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 355) and the tires. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 361).

Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 361).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Run Flat Indicator Inopera- tive

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level when next refueling.

Add engine oil (/ page 321). Notes on engine oil (/ page 392).

444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 321).

Notes on engine oil (/ page 392).

5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level

* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.

# Switch off the engine. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 321). # Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (/ page 392).

5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine

* Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star ted or during a journey.

Instrument display (standard) Widescreen cockpit instrument display

Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may differ from the example shown.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 449) Seat belt (/ page 449) Power steering (/ page 450) Coolant temperature (/ page 451) ; Check Engine (/ page 451) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 451) 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca

tion indicator (/ page 451) F USA: electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 454) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 454) ! Electric parking brake (yellow)

(/ page 454) USA: Recuperative Brake System

(/ page 454) J Canada: brakes (yellow)

(/ page 454) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 454) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 454)

L Distance warning (/ page 457) AIRMATIC (/ page 457) DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL

(/ page 457) ! ABS (/ page 458) ESP (/ page 458) ESP OFF (/ page 458) h Tire pressure monitoring system

(/ page 460) T Parking lamps (/ page 108) L Low beam (/ page 108) K High beam (/ page 109) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 109) R Rear fog lamp (/ page 108)

448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 Restraint system warning lamp

* The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Seat belt warning lamp

*The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. or The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds: The driver or front passenger has not fastened his or her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40).

There are objects on the front passenger seat.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the engine has started: In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Coolant warning lamp

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue

driving under any circumstances. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 322). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

; Engine diagnosis warning lamp

* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Electrical malfunction warn ing lamp

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

8 Fuel reserve warning lamp

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. or The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving: There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak ing. # Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running: The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (USA only)

! Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (Canada only)

! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)

J Brakes warning lamp (yel low) (Canada only)

*The yellow warning lamp (USA only) or the yellowJ brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)

J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)

* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.

456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

L Warning lamp for distance warning function

* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 170).

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC. A malfunction has occurred in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

ESP warning lamp

* The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. or

The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion: One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 152).

458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ESP OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated

ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 152).

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp

*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. or The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit: The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires.

460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit: The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC

Function................................................ 140 12 V battery

see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket

see Socket (12 V) 360 Camera

Function................................................ 187 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. 189 Selecting a view.................................... 189 Setting favorites.................................... 189

A A/C function

Switching on/off (control panel)............ 121 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 152 Acceleration

see Kickdown Accident and Breakdown Manage ment

Mercedes me connect........................... 287

Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating........................... 64

Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment

Burmester surround sound system...... 314 Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake application................................... 178 Function................................................ 177 System limitations................................. 177

Active Brake Assist Function/notes..................................... 170 Setting................................................... 174

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 168 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 169 Calling up a speed................................. 162 Function................................................ 159 Increasing/decreasing speed................ 162 Requirements........................................ 162 Route-based speed adaptation.............. 164 Steering wheel buttons.......................... 162 Storing a speed..................................... 162 Switching off/deactivating.................... 162 Switching on/activating........................ 162

System limitations................................. 159 Active Emergency Stop Assist................. 168 Active Lane Change Assist

Activating/deactivating......................... 170 Function................................................ 169

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 181 Activating/deactivating the warning..... 182 Function................................................ 179 System limits......................................... 179

Active Parking Assist Exiting a parking space.......................... 196 Function................................................ 193 Parking.................................................. 195 System limitations................................. 193

Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... 163 Function................................................ 163

Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 167 Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 168

462 Index

Active Lane Change Assist.................... 169 Function................................................ 166 System limits......................................... 166

Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................. 111 Switching on/off.................................... 112

Additives Engine oil.............................................. 392 Fuel....................................................... 391

Additives (engine oil) see Additives

Additives (fuel) see Fuel

Address book see Contacts

Adjusting the balance/fader Advanced sound system........................ 315 Burmester surround sound system...... 314

Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble

Burmester surround sound system...... 314

Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass

Burmester surround sound system...... 314 Adjusting the sound focus

Burmester surround sound system...... 314 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings

Advanced sound system........................ 315 Burmester surround sound system...... 314

ADS PLUS damping system see AIRMATIC

Advanced sound system Adjusting the balance/fader.................. 315 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings.................................................. 315 Calling up the sound menu.................... 315 Information............................................ 314 Switching volume adjustment on/off.... 315

After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS

Air bag Reduced protection................................. 44

Air distribution Setting................................................... 120

Air inlet see Air-water duct

Air pressure see Tire pressure

Air suspension see AIRMATIC

Air vents Adjusting (front).................................... 122 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 122 Adjusting the AIRSCARF vents............... 123

Air vents see Air vents

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

Air-recirculation mode.............................. 121 Air-water duct

Keeping free.......................................... 323 Airbag

Activation................................................ 36 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 42 Head airbag............................................. 42

Index 463

Installation locations............................... 42 Knee airbag............................................. 42 Overview................................................. 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 47 Protection................................................ 43 Side airbag.............................................. 42

AIRCAP Activating................................................ 75 Deactivating............................................ 75

Airflow Setting................................................... 120

AIRMATIC Setting................................................... 183 Suspension............................................ 182

AIRSCARF Activating/deactivating........................... 93 Adjusting the outlets............................. 123

Alarm see Panic alarm

Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

All-wheel drive see 4MATIC

Alternative route see Route

Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system).................. 113

Android Auto Connecting a mobile phone................... 282 Ending................................................... 282 Information............................................ 282 Overview............................................... 281 Sound settings...................................... 282 Transferred vehicle data........................ 283

Animals Pets in the vehicle................................... 62

Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains see Snow chains

Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.............................................. 82

Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)

see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay

Connecting an iPhone......................... 280 Ending................................................... 281 Notes.................................................... 280 Overview............................................... 279 Sound settings....................................... 281 Transferred vehicle data........................ 283

Assistance systems see Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods............... 317 Displaying the service due date............. 316 Function/notes...................................... 316 Regular maintenance work.................... 316 Special service requirements................. 316

ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Deactivating the alarm............................ 83 Function.................................................. 82

ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 156 Setting................................................... 157 System limitations................................. 156

464 Index

Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST

Audio mode Activating media mode.......................... 296 Connecting USB devices....................... 297 Copyrights............................................. 296 Information............................................ 294 Inserting/removing an SD card............. 296 Media search......................................... 301 Overview............................................... 297 Pause and playback function................. 298 Selecting a track................................... 298 Selecting playback options.................... 298 Track list................................................ 298

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Automatic driving lights........................... 109 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 132

Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 132 Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff

Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff................ 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 47

Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff

see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating......................... 119

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 136 Drive program display............................ 135 Drive programs...................................... 134 DYNAMIC SELECT switch...................... 134 Engaging drive position......................... 138 Engaging neutral.................................... 137 Engaging park position.......................... 138 Engaging reverse gear........................... 137 Kickdown............................................... 140 Manual gearshifting............................... 139

Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. 139 Transmission position display................ 136 Transmission positions.......................... 136

Automatic transmission (problem) see Transmission (problem)

B BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 152 Battery

SmartKey................................................ 65 Battery

see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle)

Charging................................................ 344 Charging (Remote Online)...................... 127 Notes..................................................... 341 Notes (starting assistance and charging)............................................... 342 Replacing.............................................. 346 Starting assistance................................ 344

Belt see Seat belt

Index 465

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 179 Function................................................ 177 System limitations................................. 177

Blower see Climate control

Bluetooth Activating/deactivating......................... 231 Information............................................ 231

Bluetooth audio Activating.............................................. 305 De-authorizing (de-registering) the device.................................................... 306 Information............................................ 303 Overview............................................... 304 Searching for a track............................. 306 Searching for and authorizing the device.................................................... 304 Selecting a media player....................... 305 Switching device via NFC...................... 306

Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Notes.................................................... 393

Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 154

Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 152 Active Brake Assist................................ 170 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 152 Driving tips............................................ 129 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 154 HOLD function....................................... 154 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 129 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs...................................................... 128 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 128

Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Breakdown Changing a wheel.................................. 378 Overview of the help functions................ 18 Roadside Assistance............................... 23 Tow-starting.......................................... 350 Towing away.......................................... 347 Transporting the vehicle........................ 349

Breakdown see Flat tire

Burmester surround sound system Adjusting the balance/fader.................. 314 Adjusting the sound focus..................... 314 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings.................................................. 314 Automatic volume adjustment............... 314 Calls up the sound menu....................... 314 Information............................................ 313 Switching the surround sound on/off.... 314

Buttons Steering wheel...................................... 202

C Call list

Making a call......................................... 277 Overview................................................ 276

Calling up the sound menu Advanced sound system........................ 315

Calls Accepting.............................................. 273 Activating functions during a call........... 273 Calls with several participants............... 273

466 Index

Declining............................................... 273 Ending a call.......................................... 273 Incoming call during an existing call...... 274 Making.................................................. 273 Mercedes me........................................ 283

Calls up the sound menu Burmester surround sound system...... 314

Camera see 360 Camera see Rear view camera

Car key see SmartKey

Car wash see Care

Car wash (care)......................................... 323 Care

Air-water duct........................................ 323 Automatic car wash............................... 323 Carpet................................................... 330 Decorative foil....................................... 326 Display.................................................. 330 Exterior lighting..................................... 329 Folding wind screen.............................. 329 Headliner............................................... 330

Matte finish........................................... 325 Paintwork.............................................. 325 Plastic trim............................................ 330 Power washer........................................ 325 Real wood/trim elements..................... 330 Rear view camera.................................. 329 Seat belt................................................ 330 Seat cover............................................. 330 Sensors................................................. 329 Soft top................................................. 327 Steering wheel...................................... 330 Surround view camera.......................... 329 Tailpipes................................................ 329 Washing by hand................................... 325 Wheels/rims......................................... 329 Wind deflector....................................... 327 Wind screen.......................................... 328 Windows................................................ 329 Wiper blades......................................... 329

Cargo tie-down rings................................. 103 Carpet (Care)............................................. 330 Change of address...................................... 23 Change of ownership.................................. 23

Changing a wheel Preparation............................................ 378 Raising the vehicle................................ 379

Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Changing gears Manually................................................ 139

Changing hub caps.................................... 378 Character entry

Using the controller............................... 228 Charging

Battery (vehicle).................................... 344 Child seat

Attaching (notes)..................................... 55 Basic instructions.................................... 51 Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 60 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing).............. 56 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 52 Securing on the front passenger seat...... 61 Securing on the rear seat........................ 59 Top Tether............................................... 58

Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............... 52

Index 467

Basic instructions.................................... 51 Special seat belt retractor....................... 55

Chock Storage location.................................... 377

Chock see Chock

Cleaning see Care

Climate control Activating/deactivating......................... 120 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel).......................... 121 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (control panel)............ 121 Air-recirculation mode........................... 121 Automatic control.................................. 121 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control...................................... 120 Control panel for dual-zone auto matic climate control............................. 120 Defrosting the windshield...................... 120 Filling capacity for PAG oil..................... 396 Front air vents....................................... 122 Ionization............................................... 121

Note...................................................... 120 Rear air vents........................................ 122 Refrigerant............................................ 394 Refrigerant filling capacity..................... 396 Removing condensation from the windows................................................. 121 Setting the air distribution..................... 120 Setting the airflow................................. 120 Setting the vehicle interior tempera ture........................................................ 120 Switching the rear window heater on/off................................................... 120 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 80

Cockpit Overview................................................... 6

Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST

COMAND see Multimedia system

COMAND Touch Managing devices.................................. 234

Combination switch.................................. 109 Compass.................................................... 266

Computer see On-board computer

Connecting the parcel net........................ 103 Connection status

Displaying.............................................. 292 Overview............................................... 292

Connectivity Switching transmission of the vehicle position on/off...................................... 231

Contacts Calling up.............................................. 275 Deleting................................................. 276 Downloading (from mobile phone)......... 274 Importing............................................... 275 Importing (overview).............................. 275 Information............................................ 274 Making a call......................................... 276 Name format......................................... 275 Options.................................................. 276 Storing................................................... 276

Controller Operating.............................................. 222

Convenience closing feature...................... 81

468 Index

Convenience opening.................................. 80 Coolant (engine)

Capacity................................................ 394 Check level............................................ 322 Notes.................................................... 393

Cooling see Climate control

Copyrights License.................................................... 34 Trademarks............................................. 34

Cornering light........................................... 111 Cross Traffic Alert..................................... 198 Crosswind Assist

Function/notes..................................... 153 Cruise control

Activating.............................................. 158 Buttons.................................................. 158 Calling up a speed................................. 158 Deactivating.......................................... 158 Function................................................ 157 Requirements:....................................... 158 Selecting............................................... 158 Setting a speed..................................... 158

Storing a speed..................................... 158 System limitations................................. 157

Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 28 Customer Relations Department............... 28

D Dashboard

see Cockpit Data acquisition

Vehicle.................................................... 29 Data import/export

Function/notes..................................... 236 Importing/exporting............................. 236

Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 32

Data storage Data protection rights............................. 32 Electronic control units........................... 29 Online services........................................ 32 Vehicle.................................................... 29

Date Setting the time and date automati cally....................................................... 230

Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights Switching on/off.................................... 112

Deactivating the alarm (ATA)...................... 83 Dealership

see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity

Wireless vehicle components.................. 25 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 326 Definitions (tires and loading).................. 371 Destination

Editing intermediate destinations.......... 247 Editing the previous destinations.......... 258 External................................................. 258 Saving (current vehicle position)........... 257 Saving as global favorite........................ 258 Storing a map position.......................... 258

Destination entry Entering a 3 word address..................... 248 Entering a POI or address...................... 243 Entering an intermediate destination..... 247 Entering geo-coordinates....................... 248

Index 469

Selecting a contact................................ 248 Selecting a POI...................................... 246 Selecting from the map......................... 249 Selecting previous destinations............. 245

Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST

Diagnostics connection.............................. 26 Digital Operator's Manual.......................... 20 Dinghy towing

see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever

Engaging drive position......................... 138 Engaging neutral.................................... 137 Engaging park position.......................... 138 Engaging park position automatically.... 138 Engaging reverse gear........................... 137 Function................................................ 136

Display (care)............................................. 330 Display (multimedia system)

Settings................................................. 229 Display (on-board computer)

Displays on the multifunction display.... 203

Display message Calling up (on-board computer)............. 398 Notes.................................................... 398

Display messages - - - mph....................................... 423 - - - mph....................................... 423 # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 437 K 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 405 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... 407 ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... 422 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 423 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................ 406 $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 421 # Check Brake Pads See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 422 + Check Coolant Level See Oper ator's Manual......................................... 412

5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refu eling...................................................... 444 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 445 : Check Left Low Beam (exam ple)........................................................ 406 h Check Tires.................................. 440 Check Washer Fluid...................... 412 K Convertible Top Lowering............. 404 K Convertible Top Operation Pos sible to 37 mph..................................... 404 Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off...................................... 413 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ 432 Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ 433 Don't Forget Your Key.................. 403 Drive More Slowly........................ 431

470 Index

5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 447 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi cle Turn Engine Off................................ 445 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine.................................. 446 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level.......... 445 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)............................... 399 _ Front Left Seat Backrest Not Locked (example)................................... 411 8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 414 8 Gas Cap Loose.............................. 414 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 433 Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 434 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 435 G Inoperative................................... 437

: Intell. Light System Inoperative.... 407 Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 403 Key Not Detected (white dis play message)....................................... 402 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal function Service Required (Example)..... 399 Lowering...................................... 430 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... 429 : Malfunction See Operators Manual.................................................. 406 Obtain a New Key......................... 402 Off................................................ 424 Off................................................ 422 K Open/Close Convertible Top Completely............................................ 405 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual................................................... 417 h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ 441

F Please Release Parking Brake...... 420 _ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example).................................. 411 Replace Key Battery..................... 402 # See Operator's Manual................ 438 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required................................................ 399 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.. 409 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual...... 410 # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run ning....................................................... 439 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 438 Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low....... 430 Suspended................................... 424 : Switch Off Lights.......................... 407 : Switch On Headlamps.................. 407 J Trunk Partition Open.................... 405

Index 471

F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake.................................. 421 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting............... 409 Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ 431 Vehicle Rising............................... 431 h Warning Tire Malfunction.............. 441 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. 440 K While stationary, apply the brakes before operating the soft top..... 404 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 427 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative...... 428 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur rently Limited See Operator's Manual... 435 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi ted See Operator's Manual................... 436 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 424 Active Distance Assist Inoperative........ 424

Active Distance Assist Now Available.... 424 Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man ual......................................................... 428 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 428 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera tive........................................................ 428 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 432 Active Parking Assist Maneuvering Assistance Restricted See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 431 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer gency Stops........................................... 425 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 425 Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... 425

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man ual......................................................... 408 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 408 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.. 408 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'.................. 414 Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'...................... 415 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction................. 416 Beginning Emergency Stop.................... 425 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila ble See Operator's Manual.................... 427 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative................. 427 Check Tire Pressure Soon..................... 443 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator.................................. 443 Cruise Control Inoperative.................... 423 Cruise Control Off................................. 423 Decrease Speed.................................... 442

472 Index

Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away..... 415 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................ 400 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................ 400 Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc tioning................................................... 409 Mercedes me connect Services Limi ted See Operator's Manual.................... 437 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away...................................................... 415 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta tionary................................................... 414 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 403 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 401 Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual.................................................. 436

Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ 416 Run Flat Indicator Inoperative............... 444 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer............................................ 415 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling..................... 416 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ 439 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............. 439 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors...................................... 440 Tires Overheated................................... 442 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... 415 To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 secs. or press 3 times............................ 412 Traffic Sign Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual......... 426

Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail able See Operator's Manual.................. 426 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative............... 426 Transmission Malfunction Stop.............. 416

Display on the windshield see Head-up Display

Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Door Locking (emergency key)......................... 69 Opening (from inside).............................. 67 Unlocking (emergency key)..................... 69 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 67

Door control panel....................................... 16 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 367 Drawbar

see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving.................................. 129 Drive Away Assist...................................... 198

Index 473

Drive Away Assist see Protection against collision

Drive position Inserting................................................ 138

Drive program display............................... 135 Drive programs

see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat

see Seat Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 152 Active Brake Assist................................ 170 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 152 Cameras................................................ 150 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 154 ESP Crosswind Assist.......................... 153 Overview................................................ 151 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 150 Responsibility........................................ 150 STEER CONTROL................................... 154

Driving system DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 182

Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIRMATIC see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Traffic Sign Assist

Driving tips Drinking and driving.............................. 129 General driving tips............................... 129 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 128 Optimized acceleration.......................... 128

Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Suspension............................................ 182

Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

DYNAMIC SELECT Configuring drive program I................... 136 Displaying engine data.......................... 136 Displaying vehicle data.......................... 136 Drive program display............................ 135 Drive programs...................................... 134 Function................................................ 134 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... 135 Selecting the drive program.................. 135 Showing operation feedback................. 136

E E10............................................................. 390 Easy entry feature

Function/notes....................................... 96 Setting..................................................... 97

Easy exit feature Function/notes....................................... 96

474 Index

Setting..................................................... 97 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)

Function/notes..................................... 154 ECO display

Function................................................ 134 ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start.......................... 132 Automatic engine stop........................... 132 Method of operation.............................. 132 Switching off/on................................... 133

Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 147 Applying or releasing manually.............. 148 Emergency braking................................ 149 Releasing automatically......................... 148

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 334 Overview of the help functions................ 18 Reflective safety vest............................ 333 Removing the warning triangle.............. 333 Setting up the warning triangle............. 334

Emergency braking................................... 149 Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency engine start........................... 350 Emergency key

Locking a door........................................ 69 Unlocking a door..................................... 69

Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................... 126

Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside).............................. 71

Emergency spare wheel Notes.................................................... 383

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 36

ENERGIZING COMFORT Overview of programs........................... 240 Starting the program............................. 241

Engine ECO start/stop function........................ 132 Engine number...................................... 387 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 126 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 127

Starting (start/stop button).................. 125 Starting assistance................................ 344 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 143

Engine data Displaying.............................................. 136

Engine number.......................................... 387 Engine oil

Additives............................................... 392 Capacity................................................ 392 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick.................................................. 319 Checking the oil level using the on- board computer..................................... 320 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 392 Quality................................................... 392 Topping up............................................. 321

Entering characters Function/notes..................................... 227 On the touchpad................................... 229

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

ESP Crosswind Assist................................... 153

Index 475

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating......................... 154 Function/notes..................................... 152

Exterior lighting see Lights

Exterior lighting (care).............................. 329 Exterior mirrors

Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 117 Automatic mirror folding function.......... 119 Folding in/out........................................ 116 Operating the memory function.............. 98 Parking position..................................... 118 Setting................................................... 116

F Fatigue detection

see ATTENTION ASSIST Favorites

Adding................................................... 225 Calling up.............................................. 225 Deleting................................................. 225 Moving.................................................. 225 Overview............................................... 224 Renaming.............................................. 225

First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ 334 Flat tire

Changing a wheel.................................. 378 MOExtended tires.................................. 335 Notes.................................................... 334 TIREFIT kit............................................. 336

Flat towing see Tow-bar system

Floor mats.................................................. 106 Foil covering

Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 150 Folding wind screen

Care...................................................... 329 Installing.................................................. 76 Removing................................................. 76

Free software.............................................. 34 Frequencies

Two-way radio....................................... 386 Front airbag................................................. 42 Front passenger seat

see Seat

Fuel Additives................................................ 391 E10........................................................ 390 Fuel reserve.......................................... 392 Gasoline................................................ 390 Quality (gasoline).................................. 390 Refueling................................................ 141 Sulfur content....................................... 390 Tank content......................................... 392

Function seat see Door control panel

Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 351 Dashboard fuse box.............................. 353 Fuse assignment diagram...................... 351 Fuse box in the engine compartment.... 352 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well....................................................... 353 Fuse box in the trunk............................ 353 Notes..................................................... 351

Fuses see Fuses

476 Index

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory............................. 147 Opening or closing the door.................. 147 Programming buttons............................ 145 Resolving problems............................... 146 Synchronizing the rolling code............... 146

Gas station search Starting automatic search..................... 246 Switching the automatic search on/ off......................................................... 252 Using automatic search......................... 252

Gasoline..................................................... 390 Gearshift recommendation...................... 139 Genuine parts.............................................. 21 Glide mode................................................. 140

H Handbrake

see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 354 Hazard warning lights............................... 110

Hazardous substances Information.............................................. 24

Head airbag................................................. 42 Head level heating (AIRSCARF).................. 93 Head restraint

Front (adjusting mechanically)................ 88 Rear (installing/removing)....................... 89

Head-up Display Adjusting display elements (on-board computer)............................................. 204 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer)............................................. 204 Function................................................ 203 Menu (on-board computer)................... 204 Operating the memory function.............. 98 Setting the position (on-board com puter).................................................... 204 Switching on/off................................... 205

Headlamps see Automatic driving lights

Headliner (care)......................................... 330 Heating

see Climate control

Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

High beam Activating/deactivating......................... 109

High-beam flasher..................................... 109 High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 111 Hill start assist.......................................... 155 HOLD function

Function/notes..................................... 154 Switching on/off................................... 155

Hood Opening/closing.................................... 317

Hotspot Setting up (Wi-Fi)................................... 233

I Identification plate

Engine................................................... 387 Refrigerant............................................ 394 Vehicle.................................................. 387

Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 124

Index 477

Ignition key see SmartKey

Immobilizer.................................................. 82 Indicator lamps

see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program

Configuring............................................ 136 Selecting............................................... 135

Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors

Inspection see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster Function/notes............................. 200, 201

Instrument Display Function/notes..................................... 201 Instrument cluster................................... 10 Warning/indicator lamps....................... 447

Instrument Display and on-board computer

Function/notes..................................... 200 Intelligent Light System

Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 111

Cornering light....................................... 111 Interior lighting

Adjusting................................................ 113 Ambient lighting..................................... 113 Reading lamp......................................... 113 Switch-off delay time............................. 113

Intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate destinations........................................... 247 Entering................................................. 247 Modifying............................................... 247 Starting an automatic gas station search................................................... 246 Starting the automatic service sta tion search............................................ 253

Internet connection Communication module function........... 291 Connection status................................. 292 Displaying the connection status.......... 292 Information............................................ 291 Restrictions........................................... 291

Internet radio see TuneIn

Ionization Activating/deactivating (multimedia system).................................................. 121

iPhone

see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link

J Jack

Storage location.................................... 377 Jump-start connection

General notes........................................ 342

K KEYLESS-GO

Locking the vehicle.................................. 67 Problem................................................... 68 Unlocking setting.................................... 64 Unlocking the vehicle.............................. 67

Kickdown Using..................................................... 140

Knee airbag.................................................. 42

478 Index

L Labeling (tires)

see Tire labeling Lamp

see Interior lighting Lamps (Instrument Display)

see Warning/indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic)

see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language

Notes.................................................... 235 Setting................................................... 235

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor

Installing.................................................. 56 Level control system

see AIRMATIC Light switch

Overview............................................... 108

Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights

Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 111 Automatic driving lights......................... 109 Combination switch............................... 109 Cornering light....................................... 111 Hazard warning lights............................ 110 High beam............................................. 109 High-beam flasher................................. 109 Light switch........................................... 108 Low-beam headlamps........................... 108 Parking lights......................................... 108 Rear fog lamp........................................ 108 Responsibility for lighting systems........ 108 Setting the exterior lighting switch- off delay time......................................... 112 Setting the surround lighting.................. 112 Standing lights...................................... 108 Turn signal light..................................... 109

Limited Warranty Vehicle.................................................... 29

Live Traffic Information Displaying subscription information...... 259

Displaying the traffic map..................... 259 Displaying traffic incidents.................... 260 Extending a subscription....................... 259 Issuing hazard alerts.............................. 261

Load index (tires)...................................... 369 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................... 369 Loading

Cargo tie-down rings............................. 103 Definitions............................................. 371 Notes....................................................... 98

Loading guidelines...................................... 98 Loading information table........................ 362 Loads

Securing.................................................. 98 Locator lighting

see Surround lighting Locking an external device (child safety lock)................................................ 235 Locking/unlocking

Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature............................... 68 Emergency key........................................ 69 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 67

Index 479

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 67

Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off................................... 108

Lubricant additives see Additives

Luggage Parcel net.............................................. 103 Securing.................................................. 98

Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way)............................. 88

M Maintenance

Vehicle.................................................... 23 Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction

Restraint system..................................... 36 Malfunction message

see Display message

Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating......................... 199 Cross Traffic Alert.................................. 198 Drive Away Assist.................................. 198

Map Avoiding an area.................................... 264 Avoiding an area (overview)................... 264 Changing an area.................................. 264 Deleting an area.................................... 265 Displaying online map contents............ 266 Displaying the compass........................ 266 Displaying the map version................... 264 Displaying the next intersecting street.. 263 Displaying the satellite map.................. 266 Displaying the traffic map..................... 259 Displaying weather information............. 266 Map data............................................... 265 Moving.................................................. 262 Overview................................................ 261 Selecting POI symbols........................... 263 Selecting text information..................... 263 Selecting the map orientation............... 263 Setting the map scale............................ 262 Setting the map scale automatically..... 266 Updating............................................... 265

Map and compass Overview................................................ 261

Massage program Resetting the settings.............................. 90

Massage programs Selecting the front seats......................... 90

Massage settings Resetting................................................. 90

Matte finish (cleaning instructions)........ 325 Maximum load rating................................ 368 Maximum permissible load

Calculation example.............................. 364 Determining.......................................... 363

Maximum tire pressure............................ 368 Mechanical key

Inserting/removing................................. 65 Media

Searching.............................................. 301 Media display

Notes.................................................... 220 Media Interface

Activating.............................................. 302

480 Index

Information............................................ 301 Overview............................................... 302

Media mode Activating.............................................. 296

Media search Starting................................................. 301

Medical aids................................................. 27 Memory function

Function.................................................. 97 Head-up Display Calling up stored settings................................................... 98 Head-up Display Storing settings......... 98 Operating................................................ 98 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings................................................... 98 Outside mirrors Storing settings.......... 98 Seat Calling up stored settings............ 98 Seat Storing settings............................ 98 Steering wheel Calling up saved settings................................................... 98 Steering wheel Saving settings............ 98

Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display.................................... 204 Overview............................................... 202

Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment.......... 285 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center................................................... 284 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 285 Information............................................ 284 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel............................................... 283 Transferred data.................................... 286

Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage ment...................................................... 287 Information............................................ 287 Transferred data.................................... 288

Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 124

Mercedes-Benz Apps Calling up.............................................. 292 Using with voice control........................ 292

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... 289 Information............................................ 288

Information on data transfer................. 290 Manual emergency call......................... 289 Overview............................................... 288

Mercedes-Benz Link Connecting............................................ 279 Ending................................................... 279 Overview............................................... 278 Using..................................................... 279

Message (multifunction display) see Display message

Message memory...................................... 398 Messages

Voice commands (Voice Control Sys tem)....................................................... 216

Messages see Text messages

Mirrors see Exterior mirrors

Mobile phone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link see Second telephone

Index 481

see Telephone Mobile phone voice recognition

Starting................................................. 273 Stopping................................................ 273

Model series see Vehicle identification plate

MOExtended tires..................................... 335 Multifunction display

Overview of the displays....................... 203 Multifunction steering wheel

Overview of buttons.............................. 202 Multifunction steering wheel

see Steering wheel Multimedia system

Activating/deactivating standby mode..................................................... 150 Adjusting the volume............................. 227 Calling up applications.......................... 224 Central control elements....................... 221 Configuring display settings.................. 229 Configuring drive program I................... 136 ENERGIZING COMFORT program (overview).............................................. 240

Favorites................................................ 224 Overview............................................... 220 Restoring (factory settings)................... 240 Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT program................................................. 241 Switching the sound on/off.................. 226

Multimedia system see Entering characters see Touchpad

N Navigation

Showing/hiding the menu..................... 242 Switching on.......................................... 242 Updating the map data.......................... 265 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys tem)....................................................... 210

Navigation see Destination see Destination entry see Map see Route see Route guidance see Traffic information

Navigation announcements Activating/deactivating......................... 255 Adjusting the volume............................. 256 Repeating.............................................. 256 Switching audio fadeout on/off............ 256

Near Field Communication (NFC) Connecting the mobile phone to the multimedia system................................ 272 Information............................................ 272 Switching Bluetooth audio equip ment...................................................... 306 Switching mobile phones....................... 272 Using a mobile phone............................ 272

Neutral Inserting................................................ 137

NFC see Near Field Communication (NFC)

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle......... 128

O Occupant safety

see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

482 Index

see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt

Oil see Engine oil

On-board computer Displaying the service due date............. 316 Head-up Display menu.......................... 204 Multifunction display............................. 203 Operating.............................................. 202 Overview of menus................................ 202

On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection

Online services Data storage............................................ 32

Open-source software................................ 34 Operating fluids

Additives (fuel)....................................... 391 Brake fluid............................................. 393 Coolant (engine).................................... 393

Engine oil.............................................. 392 Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 390 Notes.................................................... 389 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 394 Windshield washer fluid......................... 394

Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 25 Information.............................................. 24

Operating system see On-board computer

Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 22

Operator's Manual (digital)........................ 20 Optimized acceleration

Activating.............................................. 128 Overhead control panel

Overview................................................. 14

P Paint code.................................................. 387 Paintwork (cleaning instructions)........... 325

Panic alarm Activating/deactivating........................... 64

Park position Inserting................................................ 138 Selecting automatically......................... 138

Parked Vehicle Locator Switching transmission on/off.............. 231

Parking see Electric parking brake

Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating.............................................. 193 Adjusting warning tones........................ 193 Function................................................ 190 Side impact protection.......................... 191 Switching off......................................... 193 System limitations................................. 190

Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist

Parking brake see Electric parking brake

Parking for an extended period................ 149

Index 483

Parking lights............................................ 108 Parking position

Exterior mirrors...................................... 118 Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 118

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Payload Calculation example.............................. 364 Determining the maximum.................... 363

Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode..................................................... 150 Standby mode function......................... 149

Permitted towing methods...................... 346 Personalization

see User profile Pets in the vehicle....................................... 62 Phone book

see Contacts

Picture formats see Video mode

Picture settings see Video mode

PIN protection Activating/deactivating......................... 236

Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 330 Playback options

Selecting............................................... 298 POI

Selecting............................................... 246 POI symbols

Selecting............................................... 263 Power supply

Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 124 Power washer (care)................................. 325 Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Function.................................................. 50 PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 50

Reversing measures................................ 50

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus)

Function.................................................. 50 Reversing measures................................ 50

Preventative occupant protection sys tem

see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)

Previous destinations Selecting............................................... 245

Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT

Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 21

Protection against collision...................... 198 Pulling away

see Driving tips

Q QR code

Rescue card............................................ 29 Qualified specialist workshop.................... 27

484 Index

R Radar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage................................................. 150 Radio

Activating.............................................. 306 Activating/deactivating radio text......... 309 Calling up the station list....................... 308 Deleting stations................................... 308 Direct frequency entry.......................... 308 Displaying information........................... 309 Displaying radio text.............................. 309 Managing favorites................................ 308 Managing station presets...................... 308 Moving stations..................................... 308 Overview............................................... 307 Searching for stations........................... 308 Setting a channel.................................. 308 Setting the waveband............................ 308 Storing radio stations............................ 308 Switching the HD Radio function on/ off......................................................... 308 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys tem)....................................................... 213

Radio operating permits........................... 387

Reading lamp see Interior lighting

Real wood (Care)....................................... 330 Rear fog lamp

Switching on/off................................... 109 Rear seat

see Seat Rear view camera

Care...................................................... 329 Function................................................ 184 Opening the camera cover (360 Camera)................................................. 189 Setting favorites (360 Camera)............ 189

Rear window heater.................................. 120 Reflective safety vest............................... 333 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)

Notes..................................................... 394 Refueling

Refueling the vehicle.............................. 141 Remote Online

Charging the starter battery.................. 127 Cooling or heating the vehicle interior... 126 Starting the vehicle............................... 127

Reporting safety defects............................ 28 Rescue card................................................. 29 Reserve

Fuel....................................................... 392 Reset function (multimedia system)....... 240 Restoring (factory settings)

see Reset function (multimedia system) Restraint system

Basic instructions for children................. 51 Function in an accident........................... 36 Functionality............................................ 35 Malfunction............................................. 36 Protection................................................ 35 Reduced protection................................. 35 Self-test................................................... 35 Warning lamp.......................................... 35

Reverse gear Inserting................................................ 137

Rims (care)................................................. 329 Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............ 23 Roll away protection

see HOLD function

Index 485

Roll bar Function.................................................. 49

Roof load.................................................... 397 Route

Calculating............................................ 250 Displaying destination information........ 252 Planning................................................. 247 Selecting a type.................................... 250 Selecting an alternative route............... 252 Selecting notifications........................... 252 Selecting options................................... 251 Starting the automatic service sta tion search............................................ 253 Switching the automatic gas station search on/off........................................ 252 Using automatic gas station search...... 252 With intermediate destinations.............. 247

Route guidance Canceling.............................................. 256 Changing direction................................ 254 Destination reached.............................. 255 From an off-road location...................... 257 Lane recommendations......................... 255 Notes.................................................... 253 Off-road................................................. 257

To an off-road destination..................... 257 Route-based speed adaptation

Function................................................ 164 Route-based speed adjustment

Setting................................................... 165 Run-flat characteristics

MOExtended tires.................................. 335

S Safety systems

see Driving safety system Satellite map............................................. 266 Satellite radio

Activating/deactivating TuneStart......... 312 Adding a channel to Smart Favorites..... 312 Deleting a channel................................. 311 Displaying EPG information.................... 311 Displaying service information............... 313 Information............................................ 309 Information about Smart Favorites and TuneStart........................................ 312 Logging in.............................................. 309 Moving a channel................................... 311 Music and sport alerts function............. 311

Overview................................................ 310 Pause and playback function................. 312 Restrictions........................................... 309 Selecting a category.............................. 310 Selecting a channel................................ 311 Setting music and sport alerts............... 311 Setting the parental control................... 311 Storing a channel................................... 311 Switching on......................................... 309

SD card Inserting/removing............................... 296

Seat 4-way lumbar support............................. 88 Adjusting (electrically)............................. 87 Adjusting (mechanically and electri cally)........................................................ 85 Configuring the settings.......................... 89 Correct driver's seat position.................. 84 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back............................... 102 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards...... 101 Folding the backrest forwards/back (with memory function)........................... 90 Folding the backrest forwards/back wards (without memory function)............ 91

486 Index

Operating the memory function.............. 98 Resetting the settings.............................. 90 Setting options........................................ 16 Switching AIRSCARF on/off.................... 93

Seat belt Care...................................................... 330 Fastening................................................. 40 Protection................................................ 37

Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 41 Function................................................... 41

Seat belt extender....................................... 40 Seat belt warning

see Seat belts Seat belts

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 41 Reduced protection................................. 38 Releasing................................................. 41 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 41 Seat belt extender................................... 40 Warning lamp........................................... 41

Seat cover (Care)....................................... 330

Seat heating Activating/deactivating........................... 92

Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating........................... 92

Second telephone Connecting............................................ 270 Features................................................ 270

Selecting a gear see Changing gears

Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever

Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff.............................................. 47

Sensors (care)........................................... 329 Service center

see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display

see ASSYST PLUS Service station search

Starting automatic search..................... 253 Setting a speed

see Cruise control

Setting summer time................................ 230 Setting the date format............................ 231 Setting the distance unit.......................... 235 Setting the map scale

see Map Shift paddles

see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears

Gearshift recommendation.................... 139 Short messages

see Text messages Side airbag................................................... 42 Side impact protection.............................. 191 Side windows

Closing.................................................... 78 Closing (all).............................................. 78 Closing using the SmartKey..................... 81 Convenience closing feature.................... 81 Convenience opening.............................. 80 Opening................................................... 78 Opening (all)............................................ 78 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 80 Problem................................................... 81

Index 487

Size designation (tires)............................. 369 SmartKey

Acoustic locking verification signal......... 64 Battery.................................................... 65 Energy consumption................................ 64 Features.................................................. 63 Key ring attachment................................ 65 Mechanical key........................................ 65 Overview................................................. 63 Panic alarm............................................. 64 Problem................................................... 66 Unlocking setting.................................... 64

SmartKey functions Deactivating............................................ 64

Smartphone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link see Telephone

Snow chains.............................................. 355 Socket (12 V)

Front center console............................. 104 Trunk/cargo compartment.................... 104

Soft top Care...................................................... 327 Closing (soft-top switch).......................... 72 Closing using the SmartKey..................... 81 Opening (soft-top switch)........................ 72 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 80 Problem................................................... 78 Relocking................................................. 74

Soft-top switch............................................ 72 Software update

Performing............................................ 239 Software updates.................................. 238 System updates..................................... 239

Sound PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 50 Wheels and tires.................................... 354

Sound see Burmester surround sound system see Sound settings

Sound settings Adjusting the balance/fader.................. 313 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings.................................................. 313 Automatic volume adjustment............... 313

Calls up the sound menu....................... 313 Information............................................ 313

Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Special seat belt retractor.......................... 55 Specialist workshop.................................... 27 Speech dialog system

see Voice Control System Speed index (tires).................................... 369 Standby mode

Activating/deactivating......................... 150 Function................................................ 149

Standing lights.......................................... 108 Start-off assist

see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button

Parking the vehicle................................ 143 Starting the vehicle............................... 125 Switching on the power supply or ignition................................................... 124

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

488 Index

Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... 127

Starting assistance see Jump-start connection

Starting the engine see Vehicle

Starting-off aid see Hill start assist

Station Deleting................................................. 308 Direct frequency entry.......................... 308 Moving.................................................. 308 Searching.............................................. 308 Setting................................................... 308 Storing.................................................. 308

Station list Calling up.............................................. 308

Station presets Managing.............................................. 308

STEER CONTROL Function/notes..................................... 154

Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)............................. 95

Adjusting (manually)................................ 94 Buttons.................................................. 202 Care...................................................... 330 Operating the memory function.............. 98 Steering wheel heater............................. 95

Steering wheel heater Switching on/off..................................... 95

Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 139 Storage areas

see Storage space Storage compartments

see Storage space Storage space

Armrest.................................................. 101 Center console...................................... 101 Door...................................................... 101 Glove box............................................... 101 USB ports.............................................. 101

Stowage areas see Loading

Stowage compartments see Loading

Sulfur content........................................... 390

Surround lighting Setting................................................... 112

Surround View see 360 Camera

Surround view camera Care...................................................... 329

Suspension Damping characteristics........................ 182 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 182 Setting the suspension level (AIR MATIC)................................................... 183

Suspension see AIRMATIC

Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Setting................................................... 183

Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. 112 Interior................................................... 113

Switching the surround sound on/off Burmester surround sound system...... 314

Switching volume adjustment on/off Advanced sound system........................ 315

Index 489

Synchronization function Switching on/off (control panel)............ 121

System settings Activating/deactivating PIN protec tion........................................................ 236 Reset function (multimedia system)...... 240 Setting the distance unit....................... 235 Setting the time and date automati cally....................................................... 230 Setting the time zone............................ 230 Setting the time/date format................ 231 Switching transmission of the vehicle position on/off...................................... 231

System settings see Bluetooth see Data import/export see Language see Wi-Fi

T Tailpipes (care).......................................... 329 Tank content

Fuel....................................................... 392 Reserve (fuel)........................................ 392

Technical data Information............................................ 385 Radio operating permits........................ 387 Vehicle identification plate.................... 387

Telephone Activating functions during a call........... 273 Call and ringtone volume....................... 273 Calls with several participants............... 273 Connecting a mobile phone (Near Field Communication (NFC)).................. 272 Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 269 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)...................................... 269 De-authorizing a mobile phone.............. 271 Disconnecting a mobile phone.............. 271 Importing contacts................................ 275 Importing contacts (overview)............... 275 Incoming call during an existing call...... 274 Information............................................ 269 Interchanging mobile phones................ 270 Mobile phone voice recognition............. 273 Notes..................................................... 267 Operating modes................................... 269 Reception and transmission volume...... 272

Switching mobile phones (Near Field Communication (NFC)).......................... 272 Telephone menu overview..................... 268 Telephone operation.............................. 273 Using Near Field Communication (NFC)..................................................... 272 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys tem)....................................................... 213 Wireless charging (mobile phone)......... 106

Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony............................ 269

Telephony operating modes see Second telephone

Temperature Setting the vehicle interior tempera ture........................................................ 120

Temperature grade.................................... 366 Text messages

Calling a message sender...................... 278 Changing folders................................... 278 Composing............................................ 277 Configuring the displayed text mes sages..................................................... 277 Deleting................................................. 278

490 Index

Drafts.................................................... 278 Notes..................................................... 277 Options.................................................. 278 Outbox................................................... 278 Read-aloud function.............................. 277 Reading................................................. 277 Replying................................................. 278 Sending................................................. 277 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys tem)....................................................... 216

Through-loading feature see Seat

Time Manual time setting............................... 231 Setting summer time............................. 230 Setting the time and date automati cally....................................................... 230 Setting the time zone............................ 230 Setting the time/date format................ 231

TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. 367 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 362 Tire characteristics................................... 369 Tire inflation compressor

see TIREFIT kit

Tire information table............................... 362 Tire labeling

Characteristics...................................... 369 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 367 Load index............................................. 369 Load-bearing capacity........................... 369 Maximum tire load................................ 368 Maximum tire pressure......................... 368 Overview............................................... 366 Speed rating.......................................... 369 Temperature grade................................ 366 Tire Quality Grading............................... 366 Tire size designation.............................. 369 Traction grade....................................... 366 Tread wear grade................................... 366

Tire load (maximum)................................. 368 Tire pressure

Checking (manually).............................. 358 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. 360 Maximum.............................................. 368 Notes.................................................... 355 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system...................................... 361

Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 360 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 361 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 358 Tire pressure table................................ 357 TIREFIT kit............................................. 336

Tire pressure loss warning system Function................................................. 361 Restarting.............................................. 361

Tire pressure monitor Function................................................ 358 Restarting.............................................. 360

Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure.................... 360 Checking the tire temperature.............. 360

Tire pressure table.................................... 357 Tire Quality Grading.................................. 366 Tire temperature

Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. 360 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 358

Index 491

Tire tread................................................... 354 Tire-change tool kit

Overview............................................... 377 TIREFIT kit

Storage location.................................... 336 Using..................................................... 336

Tires Changing hub caps................................ 378 Characteristics...................................... 369 Checking............................................... 354 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 358 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system)........................ 360 Definitions............................................. 371 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 367 Flat tire.................................................. 334 Installing................................................ 381 Load index............................................. 369 Load-bearing capacity........................... 369 Maximum tire load................................ 368 Maximum tire pressure......................... 368 MOExtended tires.................................. 335 Noise..................................................... 354 Notes on installing................................. 374 Overview of tire labeling........................ 366

Removing............................................... 381 Replacing....................................... 374, 378 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system...................................... 361 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 360 Rotating................................................. 377 Selection............................................... 374 Snow chains.......................................... 355 Speed rating.......................................... 369 Storing................................................... 377 Temperature grade................................ 366 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 362 Tire pressure (notes)............................. 355 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 361 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 358 Tire pressure table................................ 357 Tire Quality Grading............................... 366 Tire size designation.............................. 369 TIREFIT kit............................................. 336 Traction grade....................................... 366 Tread wear grade................................... 366 Unusual handling characteristics.......... 354

Tool see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether.................................................... 58 Touch Control

On-board computer............................... 202 Operating.............................................. 221 Setting the sensitivity............................ 222

Touchpad Activating/deactivating haptic oper ation feedback....................................... 224 Operating.............................................. 222 Reading the handwriting recognition aloud..................................................... 223 Selecting a station and track................. 224 Setting the sensitivity............................ 223 Switching on/off................................... 222

Tow-bar system......................................... 199 Tow-starting............................................... 350 Towing away.............................................. 347 Towing eye

Installing................................................ 350 Storage location.................................... 350

Towing methods........................................ 346

492 Index

Track Selecting (audio mode)......................... 298

Traction grade........................................... 366 Traffic information

Displaying the traffic map..................... 259 Displaying traffic incidents.................... 260 Extending a Live Traffic Information subscription.......................................... 259 Issuing hazard warnings........................ 261 Live Traffic Information......................... 259 Overview............................................... 259

Traffic map see Map

Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 175 Setting................................................... 176 System limitations................................. 175

Transferred vehicle data Android Auto......................................... 283 Apple CarPlay...................................... 283

Transmission (problem)............................ 138 Transmission of the vehicle position

Activating/deactivating......................... 231

Transmission position display.................. 136 Transporting

Vehicle.................................................. 349 Tread wear grade...................................... 366 Trim element (Care).................................. 330 Trunk lid

Activating/deactivating the tailgate opening height restriction....................... 72 Closing.................................................... 71 Emergency release (from inside)............. 71 Locking separately................................... 71 Opening................................................... 70 Opening dimensions.............................. 396

Trunk partition Closing.................................................... 74 Opening................................................... 74

TuneIn Logging out........................................... 294 Registering............................................ 294 Selecting stream................................... 294 Setting options...................................... 294 Terms of use.......................................... 294

TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 293 Deleting stations................................... 293 Overview............................................... 293 Saving stations...................................... 293 Selecting and connecting a station....... 293

Turn signal indicator................................. 109 Turn signal light

Activating/deactivating......................... 109 Two-way radios

Frequencies........................................... 386 Notes on installation............................. 385 Transmission output (maximum)........... 386

U Units of measurement

Setting................................................... 235 Unlocking setting........................................ 64 Updates

Important system updates.................... 239 Information............................................ 238 Performing............................................ 239 Software updates.................................. 239

Index 493

USB devices Connecting............................................ 297

User profile Creating................................................ 237 Importing/exporting............................. 238 Options................................................. 238 Setting................................................... 237

Using the telephone see Calls

V Vehicle

Activating/deactivating standby mode..................................................... 150 Correct use............................................. 27 Data acquisition...................................... 29 Data storage............................................ 29 Diagnostics connection........................... 26 Equipment............................................... 22 Limited Warranty..................................... 29 Locking (automatically)........................... 68 Locking (from inside)............................... 67 Locking (KEYLESS-GO)............................ 67 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 69 Lowering............................................... 382

Maintenance........................................... 23 Medical aids............................................ 27 Parking for an extended period.............. 149 Problem notification................................ 28 QR code rescue card............................... 29 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 27 Raising.................................................. 379 Standby mode function......................... 149 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 126 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 127 Starting (start/stop button).................. 125 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 143 Towing................................................... 199 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 67 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)......................... 67 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 80 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys tem)....................................................... 217

Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 136 Roof load............................................... 397 Transferring to Android Auto................. 283 Transferring to Apple CarPlay.............. 283 Turning radius....................................... 396 Vehicle height........................................ 396

Vehicle length........................................ 396 Vehicle width......................................... 396 Wheelbase............................................. 396

Vehicle data storage Event data recorders............................... 33 Multimedia system/Mercedes me connect................................................... 33

Vehicle dimensions................................... 396 Vehicle electronics

Notes.................................................... 385 Two-way radios...................................... 385

Vehicle identification number see VIN

Vehicle identification plate Paint code............................................. 387 VIN........................................................ 387

Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 126

Vehicle key see SmartKey

Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS

494 Index

Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada..................... 23

Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit............................................. 336 Towing eye............................................ 350

Ventilating Convenience opening.............................. 80

Ventilation see Climate control

Vents see Air vents

Video mode Activating.............................................. 298 Activating/deactivating full-screen mode..................................................... 300 Overview............................................... 300 Settings................................................. 301

VIN Identification plate................................ 387 Seat....................................................... 387 Windshield............................................. 387

Vision Removing condensation from the windows................................................. 121

Voice command types (Voice Control System)...................................................... 207 Voice Control System

Application specific voice commands.... 207 Audible help functions........................... 208 Global voice commands........................ 207 Improving speech quality...................... 208 Language setting................................... 207 Media player voice commands............... 214 Message voice commands..................... 216 Multifunction steering wheel (operat ing)........................................................ 206 Navigation voice commands.................. 210 Operable functions................................ 207 Operating safety.................................... 206 Radio voice commands.......................... 213 Switch voice commands........................ 208 Telephone voice controls....................... 213 Text message voice commands............. 216 Types of voice commands..................... 207 Vehicle voice commands....................... 217 Voice prompting.................................... 207

Voice control system see Voice Control System

W Warning lamps

see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle

Removing.............................................. 333 Setting up.............................................. 334

Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ 458 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)........................................ 456 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... 456 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)........................................ 455 Coolant warning lamp................... 451 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)....................... 454 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................ 454

Index 495

# Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... 453 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... 452

ESP OFF warning lamp............... 459

ESP warning lamp...................... 458 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp........... 453 Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 450 Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)....................... 455 6 Restraint system warning lamp.... 449 Seat belt warning lamp................ 449 Suspension warning lamp (yel low)....................................................... 457 ! The electric parking brake (yel low) indicator lamp................................ 454 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp.................................. 460 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 457

Warning/indicator lamps Overview............................................... 447 PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. 47

Warranty...................................................... 29 Washer fluid

see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care)............................ 325 Water tank

see Air-water duct Weather information................................. 266 what3words

Destination entry with a 3 word address................................................. 248

Wheel change Lowering the vehicle............................. 382 Mounting a new wheel........................... 381 Removing a wheel.................................. 381 Removing/installing hub caps............... 378

Wheel rotation........................................... 377 Wheels

Care...................................................... 329 Changing hub caps................................ 378 Checking............................................... 354

Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 358 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system)........................ 360 Definitions............................................. 371 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 367 Flat tire.................................................. 334 Installing................................................ 381 Load index............................................. 369 Load-bearing capacity........................... 369 Maximum tire load................................ 368 Maximum tire pressure......................... 368 MOExtended tires.................................. 335 Noise..................................................... 354 Notes on installing................................. 374 Overview of tire labeling........................ 366 Removing............................................... 381 Replacing....................................... 374, 378 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system...................................... 361 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 360 Rotating................................................. 377 Selection............................................... 374 Snow chains.......................................... 355 Speed rating.......................................... 369 Storing................................................... 377

496 Index

Temperature grade................................ 366 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 362 Tire characteristics................................ 369 Tire pressure (notes)............................. 355 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 361 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 358 Tire pressure table................................ 357 Tire Quality Grading............................... 366 Tire size designation.............................. 369 TIREFIT kit............................................. 336 Traction grade....................................... 366 Tread wear grade................................... 366 Unusual handling characteristics.......... 354

Wi-Fi Overview............................................... 232 Setting................................................... 232 Setting up a hotspot.............................. 233

Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Dis play

Instrument cluster................................... 12 Wind deflector

Care...................................................... 327

Wind screen Care...................................................... 328

Windows Closing (all).............................................. 78 Opening (all)............................................ 78

Windows see Side windows

Windows (care).......................................... 329 Windshield

Defrosting.............................................. 120 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 114

Windshield see Windshield

Windshield washer fluid Notes..................................................... 394

Windshield washer system Topping up............................................. 322

Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating......................... 114 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 114

Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 355

Wiper blades Care...................................................... 329 Replacing............................................... 114

Wireless charging Function/notes..................................... 104 Mobile phone........................................ 106

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the C-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz C-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz C-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz C-Class Convertible 2021 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.